JP6528290B1 - Game console - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention provides a game console with improved information display. SOLUTION: The slot machine 100 displays an operation specific image d10 when (1) the operation order combination is internally won in the effect state 1 or 2, and (2) enlarges the display area in the final game of the effect state 1. To display the insertion image d30 having the first color to be displayed, while displaying the insertion image d30 having the second color to expand the display area in the final game of the presentation state 2, (3) the final game of the presentation state 1 When the internal winning combination in the operation sequence combination, while displaying the operation specific image d10 to enlarge and display the insertion image d30 having the first color is enlarged, while the internal selection combination is won in the final game of the effect state 2 , And an operation specific image d10 for enlarging and displaying the insertion image d30 having the second color. [Selected figure] Figure 46

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a slot machine (rolling machine) and a pachinko machine (ball-ball game).

  Conventionally, a slot machine, for example, is known as one of the game consoles. In this slot machine, the medal is inserted and the reel is rotated by operating the start lever, and the combination is internally determined by internal lottery, and when the reel is stopped by operating the stop button, the symbol display window is displayed. When a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed in accordance with the internal determination, the winning combination is established. Then, when a combination with medal payout is established, a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the established combination are dispensed.

  Such a game stand includes a game stand that displays information related to the operation of a stop button for deriving a stop mode advantageous to the player (e.g., Patent Document 1).

Patent No. 5681922 gazette (Fig. 8 etc.)

  However, there is still room for improvement in the display of information related to the operation of the stop button described above.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game console with improved information display.

In order to achieve the above object, a game console according to the present invention, as one aspect thereof, is operated to start rotation of three reels which are provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols and which are rotationally driven, and the three reels. A start operation means, three stop operation means provided corresponding to each of the three reels and operated to individually stop the rotating three reels, and displaying an image in an image display area It is a game stand provided with the image display means, The said image display means is a means to display the alerting | reporting image which shows the stop operation order of the said three stop operation means on the said image display area, The said notification image is , A first notification image, and a second notification image different from the first notification image, and the first notification image and the second notification image are each operated first to stop operation First stop showing means The image display means is an image comprising an operation notification image, a second stop operation notification image showing the second operation stop operation means, and a third stop operation notification image showing the last operation stop operation means. Is a means for displaying a background image in the image display area, the image display means is a means for displaying an insert image in the image display area, and the image display means is configured to display the background image in the image display area It is a means to expand the display area of the said insertion image, in order to reduce the display area of the said background image, when displaying the said insertion image, The said insertion image has a 1st color or a pattern, And a second insertion image having a second color or pattern different from the first color or pattern, wherein the image display means is configured to display the image display area in a first rendering state To the above While displaying one of the insertion image, a means for displaying the second insertion image in the image display area in the second effect state, the image display means, said image display area in the first effect state Displaying the first inserted image and displaying the first notification image, and displaying the second inserted image in the image display area in the second effect state; When the notification image is displayed, the image display means displays the first insertion image in the image display area and the first notification image in the first effect state. If, after the operation for the start operation unit, the first insertion image, the first stop operation notification image of the first notification image, the second stop operation notification image and the of the first notification image first The third of the one notification image While displaying apart and respective stop operation notification image does not overlap the first of the insert image first stop operation notification image, with any of the second stop operation notification image and the third stop operation notification image As described above (hereinafter referred to as the first display mode), and when the operation of the stop operation means indicated by the first stop operation notification image is performed when there is the display of the first display mode, the first The stop operation notification image is erased, the second stop operation notification image is enlarged and the first insertion image is enlarged, and the enlarged first insertion image is enlarged and the second stop operation notification image and It displays so as not to overlap with any of the third stop operation notification image (hereinafter referred to as a second display mode), and the stop operation indicated by the second stop operation notification image when there is a display of the second display mode After the operation on the stage is performed, the second stop operation notification image is erased, the third stop operation notification image is enlarged, and the first insertion image is enlarged, and the enlarged first inserted image Means for displaying so as not to overlap the enlarged third stop operation notification image (hereinafter referred to as the third display mode), and the first inserted image and the second stop in the second display mode The interval with the operation notification image is an interval narrower than the interval between the first insertion image and the first stop operation notification image in the first display mode, and the first in the third display mode distance between the the insertion image third stop operation notification image is narrower than a distance between the first insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the second display mode, the image display unit Is the second effect The display said second insertion image in the image display region in and when displaying the first notification image, after the operation for the start operation unit, the second insertion image, the first notification image the first stop operation notification image, while displaying apart and each of the first of the third stop operation notification image of the second stop operation notification image and the first notification image of the notification image, wherein The second inserted image is displayed so as not to overlap any of the first stop operation notification image, the second stop operation notification image, and the third stop operation notification image (hereinafter referred to as a fourth display mode), After the operation on the stop operation means indicated by the first stop operation notification image is performed when the fourth display mode is displayed, the first stop operation notification image is erased and the second stop operation notification image is displayed. With expansion The second insertion image is enlarged, and the enlarged second insertion image is displayed so as not to overlap any of the enlarged second stop operation notification image and the third stop operation notification image (hereinafter referred to as If the fifth display mode is displayed and the display of the fifth display mode is performed, the second stop operation notification image is erased after the operation on the stop operation means indicated by the second stop operation notification image is performed. Expanding the third stop operation notification image and enlarging the second insertion image, and displaying the expanded second insertion image so as not to overlap with the enlarged third stop operation notification image Hereinafter, this means is referred to as a sixth display mode, and the interval between the second insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the fifth display mode is the second in the fourth display mode. The inset image and the above A narrower interval than the interval between the pause operation notification image, a distance between the second insertion image and the third stop operation notification image in the sixth display mode, the in the fifth display mode first Ri closely spaced der than the distance between second insertion image and the second stop operation notification image, said image display means displays the first insertion image in the image display area in the first effect state When displaying the second notification image, when displaying the second insertion image in the image display area in the second effect state, and displaying the second notification image; In the case where the image display means displays the first inserted image in the image display area and the second notification image in the first effect state, after the operation on the start operation means, With the first inset image Separate the first stop operation notification image of the second notification image, the second stop operation notification image of the second notification image, and the third stop operation notification image of the second notification image. First display operation (hereinafter referred to as the seventh display mode), and when the seventh display mode is displayed, an operation is performed on the stop operation means indicated by the first stop operation notification image, and then the first stop is performed. The operation notification image is erased, the second stop operation notification image is enlarged, and the first inserted image is enlarged and displayed (hereinafter referred to as an eighth display mode), and the display of the eighth display mode is After an operation on the stop operation means indicated by the second stop operation notification image is performed in some cases, the second stop operation notification image is erased, and the third stop operation notification image is enlarged and the first insertion is performed. Enlarged image of the table And the interval between the first insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the eighth display mode is the means in the seventh display mode. The interval is smaller than the interval between the first insertion image and the first stop operation notification image, and the interval between the first insertion image and the third stop operation notification image in the ninth display mode is the interval The interval is narrower than the interval between the first inserted image and the second stop operation notification image in the eighth display mode, and the image display unit is configured to set the second display condition in the image display area in the second effect state. When the second insertion image is displayed and the second notification image is displayed, the second insertion image and the first stop operation notification image of the second notification image after the operation on the start operation means , The second notification image Each of the second stop operation notification image and the third stop operation notification image of the second notification image is displayed separately from each other (hereinafter, referred to as a tenth display mode), and there is a display of the tenth display mode In this case, after the operation on the stop operation means indicated by the first stop operation notification image is performed, the first stop operation notification image is erased and the second stop operation notification image is enlarged and the second inserted image Is enlarged and displayed (hereinafter referred to as the eleventh display mode), and after the operation of the stop operation means indicated by the second stop operation notification image is performed when there is the display of the eleventh display mode And means for deleting the second stop operation notification image, enlarging the third stop operation notification image, and enlarging and displaying the second inserted image (hereinafter referred to as a twelfth display mode). The eleventh display The interval between the second insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the third embodiment is narrower than the interval between the second insertion image and the first stop operation notification image in the tenth display mode. The interval between the second insertion image and the third stop operation notification image in the twelfth display mode is the second insertion image and the second stop operation notification in the eleventh display mode. The interval is smaller than the interval with the image, and the image display means displays the ratio at which the first notification image is displayed in the first effect state as the second notification image in the first effect state. The means for setting the ratio higher than the ratio for displaying, the image display means for displaying the ratio of displaying the second notification image in the second effect state in the first notification in the second effect state Rate to display the image It is characterized in that it is a means to make the ratio higher .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game console with improved information display.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an appearance of a slot machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the inside of the slot machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which expand | deploys and shows planarly the arrangement | sequence of the design given to each reel of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 19 shows a type of winning combination (including an operating combination) of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, a symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the number of awards, etc. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a lottery table of winning combinations in each gaming state of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 15 is a time chart showing execution timings of effects of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a notification mode of the operation condition notification effect of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a view for explaining a display mode of the operation correct image of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a notification mode of the operation condition notification effect of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a notification mode of a state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a view for explaining the display mode of the effect image display device when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are simultaneously executed in the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a view for explaining the display mode of the effect image display device when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are simultaneously executed in the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 15 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the gaming state control process of step S111 of FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a flow of first secondary control unit main processing, first secondary control unit command reception interrupt processing, and first secondary control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Second secondary control unit main processing, second secondary control unit command reception interrupt processing, second secondary control unit timer interrupt processing and second secondary control unit image control processing of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention It is a flowchart which shows a flow. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of an effect control process of FIG.18 (a) step S3005. FIG. 17 shows a modification of the operation correct image of the slot machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a view showing a modification of the operation specifying image of the slot machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a view showing a modification of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a view showing a modification of the operating condition notification presentation of the slot machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a view showing a modified example of the operation incorrect solution image of the slot machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a view showing a modification of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a view showing a modification of the execution timing of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a view showing a modification of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 19 shows a modification of the slot machine state transition indication effect and the operation condition notification effect according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a view for explaining a notification mode of an operation condition notification effect of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the change of the operation specific image of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 21 is a view for explaining a notification mode of an operation condition notification effect of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting production and the state transition suggestion production are performed simultaneously in the slot machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 35 is a view for explaining a modification of the display mode of the effect image display device in the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are simultaneously executed in the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a view for explaining a notification mode of a state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (modified example). FIG. 35 is a view for explaining the display mode of the effect image display device in the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are simultaneously executed in the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (Modification). FIG. 21 is a view for explaining a notification mode of a state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (modified example). FIG. 21 is a view for explaining a notification mode of a state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (modified example). FIG. 35 is a view for explaining the display mode of the effect image display device in the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are simultaneously executed in the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (Modification). FIG. 21 is a view for explaining a notification mode of a state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (modified example). FIG. 21 is a view for explaining a notification mode of a state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (modified example). FIG. 21 is a view for explaining a notification mode of an operation condition notification effect of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (modified example). FIG. 35 is a view for explaining the display mode of the effect image display device in the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are simultaneously executed in the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (Modification). FIG. 35 is a view for explaining the display mode of the effect image display device in the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are simultaneously executed in the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (Modification). FIG. 35 is a view for explaining the display mode of the effect image display device in the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are simultaneously executed in the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (Modification). FIG. 35 is a view for explaining the display mode of the effect image display device in the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are simultaneously executed in the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (Modification). FIG. 35 is a view for explaining the display mode of the effect image display device in the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are simultaneously executed in the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention (Modification). It is a table | surface explaining the kind of color of the insertion image displayed in the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and the kind of operation specific image. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting production and the state transition suggestion production are performed simultaneously in the slot machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting production and the state transition suggestion production are performed simultaneously in the slot machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the appearance of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the state where the front door of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention was opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which expand | deploys and shows planarly the arrangement | sequence of the design given to each reel of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing the kind of winning combination (including an operating combination) of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention, the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the operation or the payout of each winning combination. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control portion of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 25 is a schematic view of a specified number lottery table used for the specified number lottery of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart which shows operation outline of navigation generation state 1 of a slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the operation navigator of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows operation outline of navigation generation state 1 of a slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart which shows the lighting time of the navi generating state report lamp of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the operation navigator of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart when a navigation period of a slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention ends, and when a navigation period continues. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of main control part main processing of a slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the main control part and operation navi setting process of step S307 of FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the gaming state control process of step S312 of FIG. 64. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st secondary control part main processing of the slot machine concerning the 4th embodiment of the present invention, the 1st secondary control part command reception interruption processing, and the 1st secondary control part timer interruption processing. Second secondary control unit main processing, second secondary control unit command reception interrupt processing, second secondary control unit timer interrupt processing and second secondary control unit image control processing of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention It is a flowchart which shows a flow. A diagram showing the payouts and remarks of the combination, the small combination 3 and the small combination 4 corresponding to the types of the small combination 3 and the small combination 4 of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the small combination 3 and the small combination 4 There is a (modification). FIG. 21 is a schematic view of a prescribed number lottery table used for the prescribed number lottery of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention (Modified example). It is a time chart which shows operation outline of navigation generation state 1 of a slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows operation outline of navigation generation state 1 of a slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navi and battle production in the navi generating state 1 of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navi and battle production in the navi generating state 1 of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navi and battle production in the navi generating state 1 of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navi and battle production in the navi generating state 1 of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navi and battle production in the navi generating state 1 of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navi and battle production in the navi generating state 1 of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navi and battle production in the navi generating state 1 of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navi and battle production in the navi generating state 1 of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navi and battle production in the navi generating state 1 of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navi and battle production in the navi generating state 1 of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows operation outline of navigation generation state 1 of a slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention (modification).

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described using the drawings.

  The slot machine described below starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media is inserted and a plurality of reels, each of which has a plurality of types of symbols, receives a predetermined rotation start instruction operation, and Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, it is determined by lottery that the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is made by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotation individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the condition determined by the combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels is stopped matches the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and ends, and the game medium is not matched. It is a game stand that advances a series of games that ends without being paid out.

  Such a game stand includes a game stand for playing a so-called AT (assist time) game in which information on the operation of a stop button for deriving a stop mode advantageous to the player is notified. A gaming machine that performs AT gaming can provide the player with an entertaining game without making the gaming operation monotonous.

  However, in the related art, since various displays are performed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, it may be difficult to grasp the contents of information notification during AT game.

  The gaming machine of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of clearly and quickly grasping the contents of information notification during AT game.

First Embodiment
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a game stand according to the present invention, and comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and openable and closable relative to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) are accommodated inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface. It is configured to be able to. The reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the reels 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed roughly three roughly in the vertical direction from the symbol display windows 113 provided in front of the respective reels 110 to 112, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. There is. Then, by rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of the symbols seen from the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. Note that as such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted other than the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  At the back of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is disposed. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. The light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

  The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a pay line 114 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 114 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, upper horizontal pay line, lower horizontal pay line, right Five lines of the down pay line and the upper right pay line may be set as valid pay lines, or the same number of pay lines may be uniformly set as valid pay lines regardless of the bet number.

  The notification lamp 123 plays, for example, that an internal winning of a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1 and a special combination 2) is made in an internal lottery to be described later, or a special gaming state to be described later. It is a lamp to inform people. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. Replaying lamp 122 is capable of replaying the current game (when the medal is not required to be played if the replaying lamp 122 wins the replaying combination (details will be described later) which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. ) To the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

  The medal insertion buttons (also referred to as bet buttons) 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, one sheet is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three sheets are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is insertion of the specified number of medals, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 121 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. is there.

  The stored sheet number indicator 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout amount display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the following, in the same meaning as being paid out to a player, it may be expressed as being awarded to a player. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the number-of-payouts display 127 are seven segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 135 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 configured of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 135, and are associated with the respective reels 110 to 112. In this embodiment, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 is operated. Thus, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

  Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to a first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to a second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to a third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all the reels 110 to 112 being rotated is referred to as operation order or push order. The operation sequence of the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is called “order press operation sequence” or simply “forward press”, and the operation sequence of the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 is “middle press operation The operation sequence of stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is referred to as “reverse push operation order” or simply “reverse push”. In the present embodiment, a light emitter is provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is possible, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 133 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the bet medals and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of certificates is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout port 155 and a medal receptacle 161 are provided.

  The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for boosting the game.

  A rendering device 160 is disposed on the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the top of the rendering device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 including two right shutters 163a and left shutters 163b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image provided on the back side of the shutters 163 (effect image The display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front (the player's side) of the slot machine 100 when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157. It has become.

  The apparatus for displaying an image is not limited to a liquid crystal display apparatus, and any display apparatus capable of displaying various effect images and various game information may be used. For example, multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix It may be a display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen can be viewed by the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

<Internal configuration>
FIG. 2 is a view showing an internal configuration of the slot machine 100, and is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state in which the front door 102 is opened.

  The main body 101 is a box which is surrounded by the upper surface plate 261, the left side surface plate 260, the right side surface plate 260, the lower surface plate 264 and the back surface plate 242 and which opens the front surface. A main control board storage case 210 containing a main control board (a board on which a main control unit 300 described later is mounted) housed inside the main body 101 at a position not overlapping the vent 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242 The three reels 110 to 112 are disposed below the main control board storage case 210. A side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board (a board for mounting a first sub control unit 400 described later) is housed inside A sub control board storage case 220 is provided. Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

  A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out the medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower surface plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply 252 is disposed, and a power switch 282 is disposed on the front of the power supply 252. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied externally to the slot machine 100 into DC, converts the DC power into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the voltage to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and each device. Furthermore, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 or the like of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) is provided. There is.

  On the right side of the medal payout device 180, a medal auxiliary storage case 240 for accommodating the medals overflowing from the medal payout device 180 is disposed, and an overflow terminal is disposed behind this (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected thereto extends outside through the power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the housing 101. ing.

  The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via the hinge device 276, and a rendering device 160 and a second control board for controlling the rendering device 160 are provided above the symbol display window 113. Not shown: A substrate on which a second sub-control unit 500 described later is mounted, and an upper speaker 272 are provided. A medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals is provided at the lower part of the symbol display window 113, and a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 causes an illegal medal or the like to fall on the medal receiver 161. ing. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main effect according to a main control unit 300 for controlling the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. And a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery of winning combination, and symbols of reels. A ROM 306 storing an array etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., WDT (Watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315 b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 generates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 executes monitoring of each sensor or the like and transmission of driving pulses in response to the interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is 8 MHz, the dividing value of the counter timer 312 is 1/256, and the dividing data of the ROM 306 is 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 × 47 × 8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 300 is activated when the power is turned on, and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that varies numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. The activation signal output circuit 338 which outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when an activation signal is input from the activation signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later) To start).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from the various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, and medal insertion slot 141 for each interrupt time). Medal reception sensor of medal, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor of medal paid out from medal payout device 180, left reel 110 The state of the index sensor, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

  When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing, and stores the value in a register that stores the random value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the passage of medals. Two start levers 135 sensors are provided inside the start lever 135 and detect start operations by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are provided on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed on the corresponding medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted into the game. Detect the loading operation when loading as. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a noncontact sensor or a contact sensor.

  The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions of the mounts of the reels 110 to 112, and the light shielding pieces provided on the reel frame pass Every time I go to L level. The rotational position information indicating how much the reel is rotating from the reference position from the L level to the L level is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b. Be done. When detecting the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. The rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180 Drive circuit 326 for driving the motor, various lamps 336 (notice lamp 123, game medal insertable lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insert lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage quantity indicator 125, game information indicator 126, a drive circuit 328 for driving the payout amount indicator 127).

  Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 has a slot for an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. Game information (for example, information indicating a game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 When the value is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first secondary control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first secondary control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 402 and the CPU 404 temporarily store data. The RAM 408, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

  The CPU 404 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 every interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to an instruction from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored. The audio data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

  In addition, the first auxiliary control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, game medal inserted to the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface) The possible lamp 124, the bet button lamp, the reel backlight, the stop button 137 to 139 lamp, etc. are connected.

  Further, the first auxiliary control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to an instruction from the CPU 504.

  Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first auxiliary control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 504 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

  The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second secondary control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub control unit 500 performs display control of the effect image display device 157.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and controls the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  The CPU 504 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 every interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design array>
Next, FIG. 4 will be used to explain the symbol arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 described above. In addition, the same figure is a figure which expand | deploys and shows planarly the arrangement | sequence of the symbol given to each reel (the left reel 110, the inside reel 111, the right reel 112).

  On each of the reels 110 to 112, symbols of a plurality of types (10 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged for a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in this embodiment). Moreover, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the respective reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the "watermelon pattern" is displayed on the frame of the number 19 of the left reel 110, the "bell pattern" is displayed on the frame of the number 20 of the middle reel 111, and the "seven 1" is displayed on the frame of the number 18 of the right reel 112. The symbols "" are arranged respectively.

<Type of winning combination>
Next, types of winning combinations for the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a figure which shows the kind of winning combination (including a working combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

  The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special roles (special role 1 and special role 2) and general roles (replay role and small roles 1 to 3). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations and may be arbitrarily selected.

  Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles to shift to a special gaming state in which the player is given a predetermined profit. Also, the replay player is a role that enables replaying without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be called "activators". In addition, the “winning” in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operator without medal payout (without medal payout) is displayed on the effective line, for example, special role 1, The special role 2 and the prize for the re-playing role are included.

  The special role 1 and the special role 2 are roles (operating roles) to shift to the special game state by winning. However, medals will not be paid out due to the winning of the role itself. The corresponding symbol combination is that the special character 1 is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1 (BB1)" or "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2 (BB2)" and the special character 2 is "BAR-BAR-BAR (RB).

  When the special winning combination 1 or the special winning combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When this flag is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to a special combination internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). The flag remains on until the internal winning combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internal winning combination in the subsequent games. That is, even if the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 does not win the special combination in the game, the special combination will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, the special combination) In the case of internal winning in 1, the symbol combination of "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1 (BB1)" or "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2 (BB2)" is in a state in which it is easy to win. The special combination internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

  The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts are made, the game is shifted to a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT1). The special game state (RT4) and the re-game low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

  The re-playing combination is a winning combination (working combination) in which the player can play a game without inserting a medal (gaming medium) in the next game by winning, and the medal is not paid out. In addition, the corresponding symbol combination of the replay role is "Replay-Replay-Replay".

  The replay player may be any role as long as the player can play the next game without inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, the medal may be automatically inserted in the next game (when the medal insertion number is reset in the medal insertion number storage area to be described later) when winning in the re-game, or the winning in the re-game The medal inserted in the played game may be carried over to the next game and used.

  In “small part (small part 1 to small part 3)” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “small part 1”, “small part 2” and “small part 3” respectively), a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. In the winning combination, the corresponding symbol combination, small part 1 is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon (watermelon)", small part 2 is "ANY-cherry-ANY (cherry)", small part 3 is "bell-bell- "Bell" is. Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-Cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

  In addition, regarding small part 3 (bell), there are "small part 3a" which gets a prize when the order of the stop operation is the correct answer, and "small part 3b" which gets a prize regardless of the order of the stop operation. Later).

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the type and transition of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 6 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

  Main control unit 300 of slot machine 100 has, if roughly classified, a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state (RT2), a special winning combination internal winning state (RT3), and a special gaming state (RT4). . In this embodiment, the gaming state roughly divided into four is referred to as a gaming state of the RT system. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as AT-based gaming state), according to the AT-based gaming state determined by the main control unit 300. The first sub control unit 400 is configured to set an effect. The AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 has two gaming states, a normal state and an AT state, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 7 is a view showing a lottery table of winning combinations in each gaming state. The horizontal axis represents each gaming state, and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination. The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state to be described later is a random data acquired at the time of the internal lottery from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306, the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data corresponding to each winning combination. It is obtained by dividing the value by numerical data (for example, 65535) of a range of numerical values. For example, in the re-game low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small winning combination 1 is 512, and the winning probability of the small winning combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≒ 0.8%. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss. It is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is the value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to which combination, and the internal lottery combination is determined. In this lottery data, settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probability of at least one combination is made different are prepared, and a clerk or the like of the game store can arbitrarily select and set any setting value. Note that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

  Hereinafter, the gaming state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is the lowest (unfavorable to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, the game state excluding the special game state) the internal winning probability of re-game, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, a winning combination for internally winning is drawn with reference to the drawing table in the column of “RT1” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

  In the winning combination to be internally won in the re-play low probability state, special combination 1, special combination 2, special combination 1-small combination 1, special combination 1-small combination 2, special combination 2-small combination 1, special combination 2- There are a small role 2, a replay role, a small role 1, a small role 2, and a small role 3a. If the winning combination is not won, it is a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. In addition, that the symbol combination which concerns on a prize is not stopped by a prize line may be called "it will be a loss". In addition, the fact that the player has not won the winning combination may be expressed as "the player has been won".

  Here, "special role 1-small role 1" indicates that the special role 1 and the small role 1 are internally elected at the same time. Similarly, "special role 1-small role 2" means that special role 1 and small role 2 were internally elected at the same time, and "special role 2-small role 1" was special role 2 and small role 1 at the same time "In special role 2-small role 2" indicates that the special role 2 and the small role 2 simultaneously have the internal win. In these cases, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to any one of the combinations is displayed in accordance with the operation of the player. More specifically, as long as it is not possible to win a prize in any of the winning lines in any of the pay lines, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the pay line are stopped.

  The "small part 3a" is set so that the player's advantage and disadvantage differ depending on the player's operation order. If the internal winning combination of "small winning combination 3a" is made, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 3 is displayed on the pay line according to the operation order of the player (see remarks column in FIG. 7). . More specifically, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the correct operation order which is a predetermined operation order, "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is displayed on the pay line, and eight medals are displayed. Be paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation order, the "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is not displayed on the pay line.

  In the present embodiment, one reel stop data is selected by lottery from among a plurality of types (specifically, six types) when the small winning combination 3a is internally won, and the reel stop data The correct operation order is provided for each. More specifically, when (1) reel stop data d-1 is selected, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112, and so on. A stop operation according to the correct operation order (hereinafter referred to as a “left middle right” stop operation) according to the correct operation order, (2) when the reel stop data d-2 is selected, the first stop reel is left Stop operation according to the correct operation order, in which the stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation in the left middle right”) in which the reel 110 and the second stop reel are the right reel 112 and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111 ) When the reel stop data d-3 is selected, a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112 (hereinafter referred to as “middle Also referred to as "right and left" stop operation If the stop operation according to the correct operation order is selected, and (4) the reel stop data d-4 is selected, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is A stop operation in which the left reel 110 is a stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as a “middle right left” stop operation) is a stop operation according to the correct operation order, and (5) the first stop when the reel stop data d-5 is selected The stop operation according to the correct operation order, in which the stop operation with the right reel 112 as the reel, the left reel 110 as the second stop reel, and the middle reel 111 as the third stop reel (6) When the reel stop data d-6 is selected, the stop operation for setting the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel as the left reel 110 , "Right middle left Of also referred to as a stop operation) has become a stop operation in accordance with the correct operation order. That is, in the present embodiment, the correct operation order regarding the first to third stop operations is determined for each of the selected reel stop data.

As in the case of the "small role 3a", a combination in which a winning combination is determined by the operation order may be referred to as "operation order combination".
In the present embodiment, although there is a payout in the case of the operation sequence correct, there is no payout in the case of the incorrect answer, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of payouts may be different depending on whether the operation sequence is correct or not. That is, it is sufficient that the configuration in which the correct operation order is correct is more advantageous in the operation sequence than in the case of the incorrect answer. In the above description, the correct operation condition is the operation order, but the correct operation condition is not limited to the operation order. Not only the operation sequence but also the timing of the stop operation, or the combination of the operation sequence and the timing of the stop operation may be configured to cause advantages and disadvantages. In addition, about "small winning combination 3a" demonstrated here, it is the same also in the game state demonstrated below.

In addition, when the internal winning combination "small part 3a" is selected, the reel stop data is selected by lottery, but the reel stop data with different correct operation order correspond to each of a plurality of types of small parts, When an operation according to the correct operation order is performed, the small winning combination may be made to win. For example, the small winning combination 3a is divided into six types of low percentage 3a-1 to low percentage 3a-6, and eight medals are paid out even if any of the low percentage 3a-1 to low percentage 3a-6 wins. On the other hand, when the small winning combination 3a-1 is internally won, the reel stop data d-1 is selected, and when the small winning combination 3a-2 is internally selected, the reel stop data d-2 is selected. If the small winning combination 3a-3 is internally won, the reel stop data d-3 is selected, and if the small winning combination 3a-4 is internally selected, the reel stop data d-4 is selected, the small winning combination It is assumed that the reel stop data d-5 is selected when the internal winning of 3a-5 is made, and the reel stop data d-6 is selected when the internal winning of the small winning combination 3a-6 is made.
In the present embodiment, the correct operation order is set in the reel stop data when the small winning combination 3a is elected alone, but the correct operation order is set in the reel stopping data when a plurality of small winning combinations are simultaneously elected. May be For example, eight medals will be paid out when the small winning combination 3a is won, and the small winning combination 3a-1 and the small winning combination 3a-2 and the small winning combination 3a-3 are provided, and one winning combination is awarded The medal is to be paid out. When the small winning combination 3a and the small winning combination 3a-1 are internally won, the reel stop data d-1x is selected, and when the small winning combination 3a and the small winning combination 3a-2 are internally winning, the reel stop data d When -2x is selected and the small winning combination 3a and the small winning combination 3a-3 are internally won, it is assumed that the reel stop data d-3x is selected. In the reel stop data d-1x, d-2x and d-3x, eight medals are paid out when the operation according to the correct operation order for obtaining the largest payout is performed respectively, and the largest payout is given. If the operation according to the obtained correct operation order is not executed, one medal is paid out, or the payout of the medal becomes zero. Even if the operation in accordance with the correct operation order is not performed, there may be a payout, so it may be fun gameplay.

  FIG. 6 shows that when the AT lottery is won in the re-game low probability state (RT1), transition to a re-game high probability state (RT2) described later is made. Further, in the drawing, when the special winning combination 1 or the special winning combination 2 is internally won, transition to a special winning combination internal winning state (RT3) described later is shown. Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to special combination 1 or special combination 2 is displayed on the activated line (when special combination 1 or special combination 2 wins), it shifts to the special game state (RT4) described later It is shown.

<Replay high probability state (RT2)>
The replay high probability state (RT2) is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of the replay role is higher than that of the replay low probability state (RT1). In the re-game high probability state (RT2), a winning combination to be internally won is drawn with reference to the drawing table in the column of “RT2” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

  In the winning combination to be internally won in the re-game high probability state (RT2), special combination 1, special combination 2, special combination 1-small combination 1, special combination 1-small combination 2, special combination 2-small combination 1, special There are a combination 2-small combination 2, a re-play combination, a small combination 1, a small combination 2 and a small combination 3a. If the winning combination is not won, it is a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  In FIG. 6, when all the AT game numbers (30 games in the case of the present embodiment) are given in the replay high probability state (RT2), the replay low probability state (RT1) described above is entered. It has been shown to migrate. In the same figure, it is shown that when the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is internally elected, it shifts to a special combination internal winning state (RT3) described later, and further to the special combination 1 or special combination 2 When the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line (when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is won), it is shown to shift to a special gaming state (RT4) described later.

<Special part internal winning state (RT3)>
The special combination internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal selection flag corresponding to special combination 1 or special combination 2 is set to ON, and this flag is set by the player performing a stop operation at a predetermined timing. It is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding special combination can be displayed. In the special combination internal winning state, a winning combination to be internally selected is drawn with reference to the drawing table in the column of “RT3” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The winning combinations that are internally won in the special combination internal winning state include a re-play combination, a small combination 1, a small combination 2, and a small combination 3a. If the winning combination is not won, it is a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  Further, FIG. 6 shows that, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed in the special combination internal winning state (RT3), transition to a special gaming state (RT4) described later is made. It is done.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is a gaming state that is most advantageous to the player in all the gaming states. In the special gaming state, a winning combination for internally winning is drawn with reference to the drawing table in the column of “RT4” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In the special gaming state, only the small winning combination 3b is a winning combination for internal winning. In addition, if the winning combination is not won, it is a loss, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  When the internal winning combination of "small part 3b" is made, "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation order, and eight medals are paid out. (Refer to the remarks column in Figure 7).

  FIG. 6 shows that, in the special game state (RT4), transition to the re-game low probability state (RT1) is made when the prescribed number of sheets is paid out. Specifically, when the game mode is shifted to the special game state based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special part 1 being displayed, the game is in the low game probability state (RT1) when the payout of 360 or more medals is finished. Transition. When the symbol combination corresponding to the special character 2 is displayed and the game mode is shifted to the special game state, when the payout of 96 or more medals is finished, the game mode is shifted to the re-game low probability state (RT1).

  In the present embodiment, the special gaming state ends when payout of a prescribed number of sheets is executed, but for example, it ends when a predetermined winning combination (for example, single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times (for example, For example, the game may be ended when there is a winning of eight times, or when a game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, six times).

<Transition of AT-type game state>
As shown in FIG. 6, the AT-based gaming state is uniquely determined based on the RT-based gaming state. That is, in this embodiment, the replay low probability state (RT1), the special winning combination internal winning state (RT3), and the special gaming state (RT4) are normal states, and the replay high probability state (RT2) is AT It is a state.

  Here, in the case of the present embodiment, in the case of the present embodiment, the AT state is a notification effect relating to the operation order of the stop operation (hereinafter referred to as the operation condition notification effect) In the normal state, the operation condition notification effect is not performed.

  More specifically, the AT state refers to a gaming state in which an operation condition notification effect including an operation timing or an operation sequence of a stop operation is executed so as to obtain an advantageous result for the player. In addition, the game in AT state is also called AT game. That is, the AT state is a gaming state in which it is possible to play a game while preventing a small winning combination from being missed by the player performing an operation in accordance with an effect. In addition, in the AT state, in the playability with promotion and demotion of the game state, the player can maintain the advantageous game state without lowering the advantageous game state by performing the operation according to the effect or It is also a gaming state where it is possible to promote from an adverse gaming state to an advantageous gaming state. And the effect which alert | reports the operation order is an effect in which the information regarding the operation order used as the correct answer of the stop operation for winning an operation order combination is alert | reported. Further, the effect of informing the operation timing is an effect of informing information on an operation order combination in which a so-called drop occurs. For example, it is an effect that an image of watermelon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as information on the small winning combination 1 winning. Of course, it may be an operation condition notification effect that notifies both of the operation timing and the order of the stop operation. Thus, the AT state is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  Specifically, in the AT state, the effect of notifying the correct operation order is executed when the small winning combination 3a is internally won, so the player follows the effect when the small winning combination 3a is internally won. By performing the stop operation, medals can be acquired.

  In this embodiment, the AT state (replay high probability state) is obtained when the AT lottery executed when the small winning combination 1 is internally won in the RT1 is selected, and the AT state is determined by the predetermined number of games granted In the form, the game is ended when 30 games are consumed, and the state is shifted to the normal state (replay low probability state). Of course, the AT state ends even when there is a transition of the gaming state of another RT system (when transitioning from RT2 to another gaming state), and the AT system corresponding to the gaming state of the RT system of the transition destination Transition to the game state.

  Note that the AT state of this embodiment ends when a plurality of games are executed, but may be ended when one game is executed.

  In the following description, for example, when the RT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 is in RT1 and the AT system gaming state is in the normal state, the gaming state of the main control unit 300 is RT1 (normal state If the gaming state of the RT system of the main control unit 300 is at RT2 and the gaming state of the AT system is at AT state, then the gaming state of the main control unit 300 is at RT2 (AT state) Sometimes it is abbreviated.

<Stop control of reel>
Next, an outline of stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. The reel stop control selects one of a plurality of predetermined types of reel stop control data based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of the above-mentioned winning combination internal winning process), and the selected reel is stopped. Based on control data.

  In the present embodiment, so-called pull-in control (coma slip control) is performed. With the pull-in control, the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 is shifted within a fixed number of symbols (number of symbols) range (maximum 4 frames here) after the player operates the stop buttons 137 to 139. I say control. Reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data includes an allowable control that allows a predetermined combination of symbol combinations to be displayed on the pay line, and a prohibition control in which any combination of symbol combinations is not displayed on the pay line. It is divided roughly.

  An example in which the permission control is performed is, for example, when an internal winning is made for a certain winning combination, or during an internal winning for a special combination (while carrying a flag), and the timing at which the player operates the respective stop buttons 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is uniformly displayed within the range of the number of frames. However, since only “permit” is made, the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each stop button 137-139.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is made to small part 1 (watermelon), since the watermelon pattern is arranged beyond 4 frames, if the timing for operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon pattern is on the pay line Do not stop.

  However, depending on the arrangement of symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn-in frames, 100% may be aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replay role (replay) is 4 frames at maximum, when the replay role is internally won, 100% prize will be won regardless of the timing.

  On the other hand, as an example in which the prohibition control is performed, for example, there is a case where the internal lottery result is a loss and it is not during the internal winning of the special part (while carrying the flag), and the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139 by the player. The control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not uniformly displayed within the above-mentioned range of the number of frames even if

<Operation condition notification production, state transition suggestion production>
Next, the effects of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 8 to 14. FIG. 8 is a time chart showing an execution timing of an effect to be executed when the AT system gaming state is transitioning and when it is in the AT state. Here, the normal effect means generally the effects executed in the normal state in the AT system gaming state, for example, the background effect of displaying the normal background image d1 on the effect image display device 157 is one of the normal effects It is one. In addition, the AT effect means all effects that are executed in the AT state game state AT system, for example, operation condition notification to display the operation specific image d10, the operation correct image d20 on the effect image display device 157 The background effect that displays the effect and AT background image d2 on the effect image display device 157 is one of the AT effects.

  First, the operation condition notification effect will be described. The operation condition notification effect is executed when the small winning combination 3a which is the operation order combination is internally won in the AT state as shown in FIG. 8 (see time points t1 and t2).

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a notification mode of the operation condition notification effect. The operation condition notification effect of the present embodiment displays the operation specifying image d10 indicating the order of the correct operation of stopping on the effect image display device 157, and uses the speakers 272 and 277 to execute the order of the correct operation of stopping the operation. A sound to be displayed (for example, a sound such as “left” if the next stop operation is the left stop button 137) is output, and various lamps 420 are used to turn on / blink (for example, to indicate the order of the correct stop operation) When the next stop operation is the left stop button 137, the left side lamp 144 is lighted / flickered).

  Further, although the operation condition notification effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 9B and FIG. 11, (1) when the player performs the stop operation of the correct answer, the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the performed stop operation Is displayed to indicate that the individual stop operation was the correct answer, while (2) when the player performs an operation to stop the incorrect answer, the individual stop operation The operation incorrect solution image d20a indicating that the solution is incorrect is displayed.

  FIG. 9B shows the case where the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the AT state, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs the correct stop operation (stop operation on the left middle right). The transition of the effect image of the operation condition notification effect of is shown. Since the AT background image d2 is displayed as the background image in the AT state, the operation specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20 are displayed on the AT background image d2. In the present embodiment, an effect image in which two characters (ten and 侍) are confronted is the AT background image d2.

  FIG. 9 (b-1) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. The slot machine 100 displays the operation specific image d10 based on the start lever operation. Specifically, when the correct stop operation is "left middle right", an operation specific image d10 in which the number 1 is written in the square frame at the center lower position of the screen, inside the square frame The operation identification image d10 in which the number 2 is described, and the operation identification image d10 in which the number 3 is drawn in the rectangular frame are displayed from the left in alignment with the stop buttons 137 to 139. Thereby, the player operates the first stop operation on the left stop button 137, the second stop operation on the middle stop button 138, and the third stop operation on the right stop button 139 based on the arrangement of the numbers of the operation specific image d10. Understand that it is an operation for

  FIG. 9 (b-2) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. In FIG. 9 (b-2), since the player has made the operation on the left stop button 137 the first stop operation and the first stop operation is correct, the slot machine 100 performs the operation corresponding to the first stop operation. The specific image d10 is deleted, and the operation correct image d20 suggesting that the first stop operation is correct is displayed at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed.

  Here, the operation correct image d20 is specifically a graphic image in which the character of OK is described in a frame of a shape representing explosion or rupture, and the predetermined time L1 from the display start (in the case of the present embodiment, about) It is an animation image which disappears with the lapse of one second (hereinafter also referred to as display time L1).

  FIG. 10A shows the change of the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the first stop operation. A correct operation image d20 of transparency 0 is displayed from time t11 of the first stop operation to time t12 when a predetermined time M1 (<L1) elapses, and a predetermined time L1 elapses from time t11 of the first stop operation from time t12. Until time t13, the operation correct image d20 in which the transparency gradually changes from 0 to 100 is displayed (the operation correct image d20 gradually disappears), and finally the operation correct image d20 is performed at time t13. Disappears.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram comparing the size of the operation correct image d20 after the first stop operation and the size of the operation specific image d10. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, the operation correct image d20 is larger than the operation specific image d10 and is displayed in front of the operation specific image d10. Is more noticeable than the operation specific image d10. This is for the player to highlight and notify that the correct operation has been made. Hereinafter, displaying the operation correct image d20 larger than the operation specific image d10 may be referred to as “enlarged display of the operation correct image d20”.

  In the present embodiment, the operation correct image d20 based on the second stop operation and the third stop operation is also the same animation image, and the operation is also the same. Of course, the operation correct image d20 is not limited to the shape, pattern, or color shown in FIG. 10, and may be, for example, an image without characters, or may be a moving image with movement in characters or the like. In addition, the operation correct image d20 based on the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation may be images corresponding to the respective operations. In some cases, it may be easier to grasp the progress of the operation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the transmittance of the operation correct image d20 is changed, but the transmittance of the operation correct image d20 may not be changed. For example, the operation correct image d20 may be displayed at the same transparency (for example, 50) from time t11 to time t13. In this case, the visibility of the background image d2 is not disturbed (the display area of the background image d2 is the same as before display and after display of the operation correct image d20).

  Returning to FIG. 9, FIG. 9 (b-3) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the first stop operation disappears (after the elapse of the display time L1). It shows. At this time, the slot machine 100 continues to display the operation specific image d10 regarding the remaining stop operations (second stop operation and third stop operation) as the operation condition notification effect.

  FIG. 9B shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation. In FIG. 9 (b-4), since the player has made the operation on the middle stop button 138 the second stop operation and the second stop operation is correct, the slot machine 100 specifies the operation corresponding to the second stop operation. The image d10 is deleted, and the operation correct image d20 suggesting that the second stop operation is correct is displayed at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed.

  FIG. 9B shows the display mode of the output image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the second stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed). At this time, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specific image d10 regarding the remaining stop operation (third stop operation) as the operation condition notification effect.

  FIG. 9 (b-6) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. In FIG. 9 (b-6), since the player has made the operation on the right stop button 139 the third stop operation and the third stop operation is correct, the slot machine 100 specifies the operation corresponding to the third stop operation. The image d10 is deleted, and the operation correct image d20 suggesting that the third stop operation is correct is displayed at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed.

  FIG. 9B shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the third stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed). Since the operation condition notification effect has ended, the slot machine 100 displays only the AT background image d2.

  As described above, the operation condition notification effect of the present embodiment not only displays the operation specific image d10 to notify the player of advantageous operation content, but also when the correct operation is performed, the operation correct image is displayed each time Display d20 to notify that the operation was correct. In addition, since the operation correct image d20 is displayed larger than the operation specific image d10 and emphasized, the player can more easily recognize that the correct operation for stopping the correct operation is performed.

  FIG. 11 shows the case where the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the AT state, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs a stop operation of the incorrect answer (first stop operation for the right stop button 139). It shows the transition of the operation condition notification effect when done. Hereinafter, differences from the case of the stop operation of the correct answer will be mainly described.

  FIG. 11A-2 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. In FIG. 11 (a-2), since the player has made the operation on the right stop button 139 the first stop operation and the first stop operation is incorrect, the slot machine 100 performs the operation corresponding to the first stop operation. At the position where the specific image d10 has been displayed, an operation incorrect solution image d20a is displayed that suggests that the first stop operation is incorrect.

  Here, specifically, the operation incorrect solution image d20a is a graphic image in which the character of NO is written in a frame of a shape representing explosion and rupture, and has the same size as the operation correct image d20, As with the operation correct image d20, this is an animation image that disappears after a predetermined time L1 from the start of display. That is, the display change with the lapse of time of the operation incorrect solution image d20a involves the same process as the operation correct image d20 shown in FIG. 10 (a), and the size thereof is shown in FIG. 10 (a). As shown in the above, the image is displayed larger than the operation specifying image d10 and in front of the operation specifying image d10. Hereinafter, displaying the operation incorrectness image d20a larger than the operation specific image d10 may be referred to as “enlarged display of the operation incorrectness image d20a”.

  In the present embodiment, the operation incorrect solution image d20a based on the second stop operation and the third stop operation is also the same animation image, and the operation is also the same. Of course, the operation incorrect image d20a is not limited to the shape, pattern, or color shown in FIG. 11, and may be, for example, an image without characters, or may be a moving image with movement in characters, etc. . The operation correct image d20a based on the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation may be images corresponding to the respective operations. In some cases, it may be easier to grasp the progress of the operation.

  FIG. 11 (a-3) shows the display mode of the output image display device 157 after the operation incorrect solution image d20 displayed based on the first stop operation disappears. At this time, unlike the correct stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays an operation specific image d10 regarding all the stop operations (first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation).

  11 (a-4) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation, and FIG. 11 (a-6) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. There is. The operation sequence of the correct answer in the present embodiment is so-called "six choices". Therefore, when the first stop operation is an incorrect answer, the second stop operation and the third stop operation become an incorrect answer. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11 (a-4) and (a-6), in the slot machine 100, the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation and the third stop operation is displayed at each of the positions: An operation incorrect solution image d20 indicating that the second stop operation and the third stop operation are incorrect is displayed.

  In addition, the operation specific image d10 related to all the stop operations (the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the third stop operation) is similarly performed even after the operation incorrectness image d20 displayed based on the second stop operation disappears. It is displayed (see FIG. 11 (a-5)).

  As described above, each time the operation condition notification effect of the present embodiment performs the correct operation, it not only displays the operation correct image d20 to notify that the operation is the correct solution, but also performs an incorrect operation. Also in this case, the operation incorrect answer image d20a is displayed each time to notify that the operation is incorrect. Then, since the operation incorrect solution image d20a is displayed larger than the operation specific image d10 and emphasized, the player can more easily recognize that the operation for stopping the incorrect solution has been performed.

  Next, the state transition suggestion effect will be described. The state transition suggestion effect is an image effect to be executed in the final game G1 in the normal state and the final game G2 in the AT state as shown in FIG. 8, and the game operation (start lever operation, first stop operation, second stop) This is an effect of displaying the insertion image d30 which gradually shields the background image (the normal background image d1 in the normal state and the AT background image d2 in the AT state) each time the operation or the third stop operation). Specifically, the insertion image d30 is an effect image that is inserted when the background image d1 changes to the AT background image d2 when transitioning from the normal state to the AT state, and changes from the AT state to the normal state In this case, it is an effect image that is inserted when the AT background image d2 changes to the background image d1. That is, in the present embodiment, the background image is changed through the display of the insertion image d30.

  Although details will be described later, the operations of the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are set in consideration of the case where both effects are simultaneously performed. Therefore, the state transition suggestion effect does not display the insertion image d30 in an instant all over the display area of the effect image display device 157, but is an effect of gradually enlarging the area (area) of the insertion image d30.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the insertion image d30 is an image of "blow", and the "blow" is gradually dropped from above the screen on the background image so as to be inserted. The display area (display area) of the image d30 is enlarged, and the display area (display area) of the background image is gradually shielded. Specifically, the slot machine 100 is also referred to as a moving time L2 for a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 seconds in the present embodiment) in the wake of one game operation (start lever operation, first to third stop operations). To display an image of “sliding” falling at a constant speed, and after a predetermined time L 2, display the image of “sliding” whose movement has stopped until the next stop operation is performed. There is. In the case of the third stop operation, after the movement of the "sliding" is stopped, the display of the "sliding" is erased after the lapse of the predetermined time L3.

  FIG. 12A is a time chart showing a change in the insertion image d30 displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the state transition suggestion effect. FIG. 12A shows a state transition suggestion effect in the final game G1 of the normal state in which the normal background image d1 is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an effect image in which two characters (ten, 爺) appear is set as a normal background image d1.

  FIG. 12A-1 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. The slot machine 100 starts the display of the inserted image d30 based on the start lever operation, and enlarges and moves the area of the inserted image d30 from the upper side of the screen to the lower side. Then, after the start lever operation, when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped, and the insertion image d30 is displayed on about 1/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157. Thereafter, the insertion image d30 which has been stopped moving is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 12A-2 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. The slot machine 100 further zooms the area of the insertion image d30 downward based on the first stop operation. Then, after the first stop operation, when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped, and the insertion image d30 is displayed on about 2/5 of the display area of the effect image display device 157. Thereafter, the insertion image d30 which has been stopped moving is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 12B is a diagram showing a display change of the insertion image d30 operated based on the first stop operation. Here, FIG. 12B shows a display change of the inserted image d30 when the left stop button 137 is operated as the first stop operation, and the inserted image d30 started to move downward with the left stop button 137 as a trigger. Indicates that the movement is stopped when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 second) has elapsed.

  In this embodiment, since the time until the next stop operation becomes effective after the stop operation is about 0.2 seconds, the next stop operation is not effective during the movement of the blind, and the movement of the blind is not performed. The next stop operation becomes effective after the stop. That is, in the present embodiment, since the change of the insertion image d30 is completed quickly, the change of the insertion image d30 does not interfere with the stop operation.

  Referring back to FIG. 12 (a), FIGS. 12 (a-3) and 12 (a-4) show the display modes of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation and after the third stop operation, respectively. ing. Similar to the case of the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 further zooms the area of the insertion image d30 downward based on the second stop operation and the third stop operation. Then, after the second stop operation and the third stop operation, movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed, and the insertion image d30 is displayed in about half of the display area of the effect image display device 157, It is displayed on about 3/4 of the display area of the effect image display device 157 or the like. Thereafter, the insertion image d30 which has been stopped moving is continuously displayed.

  After the third stop operation, as shown in FIG. 12 (a-5), the effect image display device 157 is entirely covered with the insertion image d30. Then, when a predetermined time L3 has elapsed from this state, the slot machine 100 erases the insertion image d30, and as shown in FIG. 12 (a-6), an AT background image d2 indicating an AT state is displayed as an effect image It displays on the display device 157. As a result, the player can grasp that the AT state has been obtained from the change of the background image.

  In the present embodiment, although the insertion image d30 is an image of "sliding", the insertion image d30 is not limited to this. The insertion image d30 may be any image as long as it is a low-key image (for example, a single color, uniform uniform pattern, etc.). This is because, in the present embodiment, it is desirable to make the player pay attention to the operation correct image d20 (the operation incorrect image d20a) described above. Further, in the present embodiment, although the method of erasing the insertion image d30 in an instant is adopted, the present invention is not limited to this, and may gradually erase. Further, variations may be given to the time until the inserted image d30 displayed on the entire surface of the effect image display device 157 is deleted. For example, 3 seconds, 2 seconds, and 1 second are provided as the plurality of types of time, and one of the times is selected. When the gaming state after displaying the insertion image d30 is a gaming state advantageous to the player, 3 seconds which is a long time is easily selected, and the gaming state after displaying the insertion image d30 is a game against the player In the state, if it is easy to select 1 second which is a short time, it may be possible to change the player's sense of expectation depending on the time until the inserted image d30 displayed on the front is erased.

  Further, as the insertion image d30, the appearance display frequency of the unobtrusive sober image may be increased, and the appearance display frequency of the noticeable image (for example, a floral pattern, rainbow color, etc.) may be set to be reduced. If you apply for images that stand out infrequently, you may be able to expect benefits.

  In addition, although the insertion image d30 of this embodiment started the display in response to the start lever operation, the display may be started based on another trigger, for example, the end of one game. The display may be started based on the insertion of the game medals. Further, although the case where the insertion image d30 is displayed in front of the normal background image d1 has been described in the present embodiment, the insertion image d30 and the normal background image d1 may not be displayed overlapping each other, for example The display of the normal background image d1 may be reduced along with the enlargement of the display of the inserted image d30 in a situation where the inserted image d30 and the normal background image d1 do not overlap.

  Further, the state transition suggestion effect of the present embodiment is executed when the AT-based gaming state changes, but may be executed also when the AT-based gaming state does not change in addition to this. . For example, effects may be displayed during the normal state (effects that are expected to shift from the normal state to the AT state; the normal background image d1 is displayed, the insertion image d30 is displayed, and the normal background image d1 is displayed). In addition, an effect to be displayed during the AT state (a surprising effect that transitions from the AT state to the normal state) may be displayed. The AT background image d2 is displayed, the insertion image d30 is displayed, and the AT background image d2 is displayed. In some cases, it may be possible for the player to be surprised.

  Next, a case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are executed in the same game will be described. In this embodiment, when the operation order combination is internally won in the final game of the AT state, both the operation condition notification effect and the execution condition of the state transition suggestion effect are satisfied, so the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect Will be executed at the same time.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, even when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are simultaneously performed, the operation of each effect is the same as the case where it is independently performed. . In other words, in any of the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect, the effect data in the case of executing independently and in the case of executing both effects are common, and the operations of the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect Is set in consideration of the case where both effects are simultaneously executed.

  FIG. 13A shows the case where the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the final game in the AT state, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs a correct stop operation (stop operation on the left middle right). The change of the production image (the operation specific image d10, the operation correct image d20) of the operation condition alerting | presentation effect when performed and the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect is shown.

  FIG. 13A shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 before the start lever operation. Since the slot machine 100 is in the AT state, the AT background image d2 is displayed as the background image.

  FIG. 13A-2 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. After the start lever operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specific image d10 on the AT background image d2 and starts the display of the insertion image d30 based on the start lever operation, and starts the display of the insertion image d30 from the upper side of the screen Move down downward.

  Here, the operation specifying image d10 and the insertion image d30 shown in FIG. 13 (a-2) are the operation specifying image shown in FIG. 12 (a-1) and the operation specifying image shown in FIG. 9 (b-1) It is identical to d10. That is, the moving time of the "sliding" which is the insertion image d30, the moving mode such as the moving position (stop position), and the display mode of the operation specifying image d10 are exactly the same as those performed alone. Note that the insertion image d30 and the operation specifying image d10, which change based on the subsequent stop operation, are also the same as the insertion image d30 shown in FIG. 12 (a) and the operation specifying image d10 shown in FIG. 9 (b). .

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the inserted image d30 when the predetermined time L2 elapses after the operation of the start lever, and thereafter continuously displays the moved image d30.

  FIG. 13A shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. The slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the first stop operation was displayed based on the first stop operation and further zooms the area of the insertion image d30 downward. Let In addition, the display mode of the operation correct image d20 shown in FIG. 13 (a-3) is exactly the same as the display mode of the operation correct image d20 shown in FIG. 9 (b). That is, also in the case of simultaneously executing the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect, the operation correct image d20 is displayed so as to be larger than the operation specific image d10.

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 elapses after the first stop operation, and subsequently displays the movement stoppage of the insertion image d30.

  FIG. 13 (a-4) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation. The slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation was displayed based on the second stop operation and further zooms the area of the insertion image d30 downward. Let

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 elapses after the second stop operation, and subsequently displays the movement-stopped insertion image d30.

  FIG. 13A-5 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. The slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation was displayed based on the third stop operation and further zooms the area of the insertion image d30 downward. Let In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13 (a-5), when the operation correct image d20 and the insertion image d30 overlap, the operation correct image d20 is inserted in the insertion image d30 in order to make the operation correct image d20 noticeable. It is displayed in front of the.

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the third stop operation, and subsequently displays the movement-stopped insertion image d30.

  FIG. 13 (a-6) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 when the movement of the insertion image d30 based on the third stop operation is completed, and the effect image display device 157 displays the entire image by the insertion image d30. Covered by Then, when a predetermined time L3 has elapsed from this state, the slot machine 100 erases the inserted image d30, and produces a normal background image d1 indicating a normal state as shown in FIG. 13 (a-7). The image is displayed on the image display device 157. As a result, the player can grasp that the normal state has been reached from the change of the background image.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of simultaneously executing the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect, as shown in FIG. 13B, the insertion image d30 goes to the operation specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20. Since the image is enlarged and moved, it is possible to give the impression that the peripheral region of the operation correct image d20 is narrowed, and the operation correct image d20 can be further emphasized. More specifically, the insertion image d30 moves downward at approximately the same ratio every three stop operations, and the operation correct image d20 corresponding to each stop operation is enlarged and displayed. Each d20 can be highlighted.

  In recent years, there is a tendency to enlarge the effect image display device 157 in order to enhance the effect of the effect. However, with the enlargement of the effect image display device 157, various new problems occur. The display of the state transition suggestion effect mentioned above is one of them.

  In the background image conventionally displayed in the entire image display area, in order to make an image or the like suggesting a lottery result stand out, an image with a small change in expression mode is used. Therefore, in the case of displaying an image intended to change the background image (for example, the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect), if the player gives an impression that the image is not the background image or displays a larger image than before, the player You may get an unexpected impression.

  As described above, in the display of the state transition suggestion effect, the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect gives the player an impression that the designer does not intend, and as a result, the cause of causing the player's operation sense to be disturbed There was a possibility of becoming.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect is displayed, the display (for example, the operation correct image d20) related to the player operation is made to stand out.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the display time L1 (about 1 second) of the operation correct image d20 is longer than the movement time L2 (about 0.1 second) of the inserted image d30, the player moves the inserted image d30. The operation correct image d20 in the finished state can be shown for a longer time (about 0.9 seconds) than the operation correct image d20 being moved. As a result, the player can more easily understand that the stop operation is correct.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the area of the operation specific image d10 is not shielded while the insertion image d30 is enlarged and moved, so that the notification content of the operation specific image d10 is visually disturbed when the stop operation is performed. Absent. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 14 is a view showing the display position of the insertion image d30 and the operation specific image d10 immediately before the third stop operation of the game in which the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are simultaneously executed. More specifically, FIG. 14A shows the case where the correct third stop operation is the operation for the right stop button 139, and FIG. 14B shows the case that the correct third stop operation is the operation for the middle stop button 138. FIG. 14C shows the case where the third stop operation of the correct answer is an operation on the left stop button 137. Here, “immediately before the third stop operation” means a time point between (a-4) and (a-5) in FIG. 13A, and the enlargement movement of the insertion image d30 based on the second stop operation is stopped. , When the inserted image d30 is in a stopped state. That is, just before the third stop operation, the lower end of the insertion image d30 is at the lower limit position P4 based on the second stop operation.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the insertion image d30 immediately before the third stop operation is the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation, regardless of the correct stop operation. Since there is no concealment, even when any of the operation specific images d10 of the plurality of types of operation specific images d10 is selected, the content of the operation specific image d10 is surely ensured from the first stop operation to the third stop operation. Can be notified to the player. As a result, the player can perform the stop operation of the correct answer without being disturbed by the enlarged movement of the inserted image d30.

  As described above, in the game in which the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect of the present embodiment are simultaneously executed, the enlargement movement of the insertion image d30 emphasizes the operation correct image d20 and makes the insertion correct image d20 The player is able to perform the stop operation with ease because he is moving in an enlarged manner in a manner not to hide d10.

  In addition, although the case where the player performed the stop operation of a correct answer in the game which performs operation condition alerting production and a state transition suggestion production simultaneously was demonstrated using FIG.13 and FIG.14, the operation for stopping an incorrect answer was performed. Also in this case, the slot machine 100 performs substantially the same operation. That is, the slot machine 100 performs the same operation except that the operation incorrect answer image d20 a is displayed instead of the operation correct answer image d20, and the enlargement movement of the insertion image d30 emphasizes the operation incorrect answer image d20 and makes it stand out Then, the insertion image d30 is enlarged and moved so as not to hide the operation specific image d10.

<Operation of slot machine>
Hereinafter, processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 15 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initialization, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of interrupt prohibition, initialization of the I / O 310, initialization of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation allowance to the WDT 314 and initialization Set the value etc.

  In step S102, a bet number setting / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not the medal has been inserted, and preparation for the transmission of the insertion command indicating that the medal has been inserted is performed. In the case where the player plays a winning combination in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is inserted, so that the player does not need to insert the medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 is operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103. In step S102, when the start lever 135 is operated, preparation for transmitting a start lever operation command indicating that the start lever has been operated is sent to the first auxiliary control unit 400.

  In step S103, the number of inserted medals is determined, and a pay line determination process of determining a valid pay line is performed.

  In step S104, random number acquisition processing for acquiring the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is performed.

  In step S105, a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the internal winning combination lottery process, the internal winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104, and Preparation for transmitting an internal lottery command indicating the result to the first sub control unit 400 is performed. As a result of the internal lottery, when the internal winning combination is made to any winning combination (including the operating combination), the flag of the winning combination is turned on. When the small winning combination 1 is won as a result of the winning combination internal lottery processing and the AT drawing is won, the internal lottery command includes information indicating the small winning combination 1 and the AT winning.

  In step S106, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, in step S106, preparation for transmitting a reel stop data command including information on the selected reel stop data to the first sub control unit 400 is performed. When the small winning combination 3a is internally won, the stop operation order of the reel stop data and the correct answer is in a one-to-one relationship, so the first sub control unit 400 stops the correct answer from the received reel stop data command. It is possible to grasp the operation order.

  In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110-112.

  In step S108, a reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, reception of the stop buttons 137 to 139 becomes possible, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of the reel stop data is stopped to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. By referring to it, one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn-in frames set in the stop table. When all the reels 110 to 112 stop, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S108, stop button reception commands related to the stop buttons 137 to 139 subjected to the stop operation for each stop operation (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation Prepares to transmit the stop button acceptance 2 command and the stop button acceptance 3 command) for the third stop operation to the first sub control unit 400, and the reels are stopped for the stop of each reel. Reel stop command related to the stop position of the reel (specifically, for the first stop reel, the reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, the reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, the reel stop) 3) are prepared to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S109, a prize determination process is performed to determine a prize. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "BELL-BELL-BELL" is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that the small winning combination 3 (BELL) is won. Further, in this step S109, preparation for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub control unit 400 is performed.

  In step S110, a medal giving process is performed. In the medal awarding process, if the player has won a winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of pay lines.

  In step S111, a game state control process (described in detail later) is performed. In the gaming state control process, processing regarding the transition of each gaming state of the RT system and the AT system is performed, and the gaming state is transitioned by the establishment of the start condition or the termination condition. In addition, preparation for transmitting a game state command including information (RT system and AT system) indicating the current game state is performed.

  One game ends by the above. Thereafter, the game proceeds by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing.

  The various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S1006 in FIG. 16) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S1001, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S1002, the WDT 314 is periodically (this process is not performed) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error does not occur) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S1003, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of the sensor circuit 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is divided for each of the various sensors 318. It stores in the provided signal state storage area.

  In step S1004, various game processes are executed, and a process corresponding to the interrupt status is executed.

  In step S1005, a timer update process is performed. More specifically, the various timers are updated in each time unit.

  In step S1006, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S1007, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S1008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S1003 are read out, and the presence or absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality and medal discharge abnormality is monitored, and an error is detected. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, in accordance with the current gaming state, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker on which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various seven-segment (SEG) indicators are set.

  In step S1009, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S1011, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step S1010.

  In step S1010, various processes are performed to end the timer interrupt end process. In this timer interruption end processing, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S1001 are set in the respective original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in step S1011, the power saving process such as initialization of the I / O port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for restoring to the state upon power interruption at the time of power recovery as restoration data. The process then returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

<Playing state control processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the gaming state control process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the gaming state control process of step S111 of FIG.

  In step S201, AT update processing is performed. In the AT updating process, when the AT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 is the AT state (RT system gaming state is RT2), a process of counting the number of AT state games is performed. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the current remaining number of games in the AT state.

  In step S202, it is determined whether the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 has been won. If the special role 1 or the special role 2 is won, the process proceeds to step S203. If not, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S203, since the special role 1 or the special role 2 is won, the gaming state of the RT system is set to RT4, and the gaming state of the AT system is set to the normal state. After the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S204, it is determined whether the current remaining number of games in the AT state is zero. If the current remaining game number in the AT state is 0, that is, if the AT state ends, the process proceeds to step S205, and if not, the process proceeds to step S206.

  In step S205, since the current remaining game number in the AT state is 0, the RT system gaming state is set to RT1, and the AT system gaming state is set to the normal state. After the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S206, it is determined whether AT is won in the current game. If AT is won in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S 707. If not, the process proceeds to step S 208.

  In step S207, since the AT lottery has been won in the current game of RT1, the RT system gaming state is set to RT2 and the AT system gaming state is set to the AT state. After the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S208, it is determined whether or not the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 has been internally won. If the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the process proceeds to step S209. If not, the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S209, since the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the gaming state of the RT system is set to RT3 and the gaming state of the AT system is set to the normal state. After the process of step S209 ends, the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, other game state control processing is performed. For example, when the gaming state has won the special role 1 and shifts to RT4 (normal state), RT4 (normal state) is ended by the medal payout exceeding 360 sheets, and RT1 (normal state) is set. Further, when the gaming state has won the special role 2 and shifts to RT4 (normal state), RT4 (normal state) is ended by the medal payout exceeding 96 sheets, and RT1 (normal state) is set. In step S210, preparation is made to transmit a gaming state command indicating the gaming state of the RT system and the AT system of the main control unit 300. In the case of the AT state, information on the number of AT games is also included in the game state command.

<Process of first sub control unit>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 18A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 18B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 18C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 18 (a).

  When power is turned on, first, in step S3001, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information indicating the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information indicating a gaming state, are respectively provided in the RAM 408.

  In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In step S3003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S3004, command processing which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300 is executed.

  In step S3005, an effect control process (described in detail later) is performed. Here, preparation for rendering is performed in accordance with the rendering reservation information in the rendering reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, processing such as reading out the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing processing of updating the effect data when it is necessary to update the effect data.

  In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read out in step S3005, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418.

  In step S3007, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, when there is an instruction for various lamps 420 in the effect data read out in step S3005, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, when a command for shutter control is included in the effect data read in step S3005, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

  In step S3009, information output processing is performed to set to transmit a command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the processing result in step S3005. For example, when there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S3005, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S3002.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 18 (b). The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first secondary control unit main processing shown in FIG. 18A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S3202, transmission of a command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S3008, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

<Process of second sub control unit>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 19A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 19B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 19C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 19D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S5001 of FIG. 19A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S5001, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S5002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5003.

  In step S5003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S5004, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S5005, an effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S5004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is performed to read out from the ROM 506 effect data for performing image control on the background image and effect data for the shutter effect. Further, processing such as reading out effect data other than this from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, updating processing of the effect data is performed.

  In step S5006, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S5005. For example, when an instruction for image control is included in the effect data read out in step S5005, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notice image, background image) is performed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S5002.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 19 (b). The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S5101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S5201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S5002 in the second secondary control unit main processing shown in FIG. 19A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S5002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S5202, an update process of the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, the image control process of step S5007 in the main process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 19 (d). The figure is a figure which shows the flowchart which shows the flow of image control processing.

  In step S5301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S5302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 534 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5303, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for

  In step S5303, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S421, the CPU 504 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 536, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc. are indicated to the VDP 534. The VDP 534 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S5304, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

  In step S5305, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 534 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5306; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input.

  In step S5306, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts the number of images of a scene is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Effect control process>
Next, the effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect control process of step S3005 of FIG.

  In step S3301, based on the content of the received game state command, it is determined whether the game state is in RT2 (AT state). If the gaming state is RT2 (AT state), the process proceeds to step S3302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3307.

  In step S3302, based on the information on the number of AT games included in the received gaming state command, it is determined whether or not it is the final game in the AT state. If it is the final game in the AT state, the process proceeds to step S3303. If not, the process proceeds to step S3305.

  In step S3303, it is determined based on the reception of the start lever operation command whether or not the start lever operation has been performed. If the start lever operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3304. If not, the process proceeds to step S3305.

  In step S3304, since it is at the time of the start lever operation of the final game in the AT state, state transition indication effect is set. Thereby, a state transition suggestion effect is started, and the insertion image d30 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see FIG. 12 (a-1)).

  In step S3305, it is determined based on the content of the received internal lottery command whether or not the internal winning combination has been won by the operation order combination (specifically, the small combination 3a). If the operation order combination has been internally won, the process proceeds to step S3306. If not, the process proceeds to step S3307.

  In step S3306, in the AT state, since the operation order combination (specifically, the small combination 3b) is internally won, the operation condition notification effect is set. Thus, the operation order notification effect using the effect image display device 157, the speakers 272 and 277, the various lamps 420, and the like is executed, and the operation specific image d10 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (FIG. -1)). The correct operation order is set based on the contents of the reel stop data command.

  In step S3307, other effect control processing is performed. For example, when the state transition suggestion effect is being executed in the AT state, update processing of the state transition suggestion effect is performed based on the stop operation (first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation). By the update processing of the state transition suggestion effect, the effect image display device 157 displays the insertion image d30 which moves the area in an enlarged manner. In addition, when the stop operation of the correct answer is performed during execution of the operation condition notification effect in the AT state, the effect setting for displaying the operation correct image d20 is performed, and when the stop operation of the incorrect answer is performed, the operation incorrect answer The effect setting for displaying the image d20a is performed. As a result, the correct operation image d20 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the incorrect operation image d20a is displayed. Further, when the AT is won in RT1 (normal state), the final game of RT1 (normal state) is to be made, so that state transition suggestion effect is set. Thereby, a state transition suggestion effect is started, and the insertion image d30 is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

<Other Modifications>
FIG. 21 is a view showing a modified example of the operation correct image d20. In the present embodiment (the first embodiment), the size of the operation correct image d20 is the same over the display time L1, and the image is larger than the operation specific image d10. However, the size of the operation correct image d20 does not have to be the same over the entire display time L1, and may be displayed larger than the operation specific image d10 in at least a part of the display time L1.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 21A, the operation correct image d20 displayed smaller than the operation specific image d10 at the display start time t11 is gradually increased from the time t11 to the middle time t12 of the display time L1. It may be enlarged to be larger than the operation specific image d10, and the same size may be displayed after time t12. There are cases where the operation correct image d20 can be made more prominent than the operation specific image d10. Note that the display mode of the operation correct image d20 may be changed while maintaining or enlarging the mode that indicates that the user has made the correct operation.

  In the present embodiment, the transmittance of the operation correct image d20 is changed from 0% from time t11 to time t12 and from 0% to 100% from time t12 to time t13. However, the change (the appearance) of the transmittance of the operation correct image d20 is not limited to this, and the operation correct image d20 is clearly (at a transmittance of 0%) in at least a part of the display time L1. Display it. The display mode of the operation correct image d20 may be changed while changing the degree of transparency while maintaining the mode in which it is possible to know that the user has made the correct operation.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 21B, from 100% to 0% from 100% of the display start time to t12 from the display start time, from 0t to 100% from the time point t12 to the display end time t13. May be displayed most clearly at time t12. This is because the operation correct image d20 can be made more prominent than the operation specific image d10.

  In addition, the enlargement process of the operation correct image d20 shown in FIG. 21 (a) may be combined with the change process of the transmittance of the operation correct image d20 shown in FIG. 21 (b).

  FIG. 22 is a view showing a modified example of the operation specifying image d10. In the present embodiment, the operation specifying image d10 using numbers is used, but it is not necessary to use numbers for the operation specifying image d10 as long as the player can grasp the order of the stop operation.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the operation order may be notified by the size of the operation specific image d10, and the size of the operation specific image d10 (hereinafter referred to as d10a) corresponding to the next stop operation The order of the stop operation may be notified by making the size larger than the size of the operation specific image d10 (hereinafter referred to as d10b) corresponding to the remaining stop operation. Specifically, when the correct stop operation is “left middle right”, as shown in FIG. 22A, before the first stop operation, the operation specific image d10 a corresponding to the left stop button 137 is stopped in the middle before the first stop operation. The operation specific image d10b corresponding to the button 138 and the operation specific image d10b corresponding to the right stop button 139 are displayed larger, and after the first stop operation, the operation specific image d10a corresponding to the middle stop button 137 is right-stopped It is displayed larger than the operation specific image d10b corresponding to the button 139.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 22, although the sizes are different, the contents of the operation specifying image d10a and the operation specifying image d10b are the same (for example, an image of a figure like sitting and thinking) is not limited to this. The contents may be different.

  Further, also in the modification shown in FIG. 22, as shown in FIG. 22B, the operation correct image d20 is larger than the operation specific image d10a in order to make the operation correct image d20 stand out. Note that the operation correct image d20 of the modified example shown in FIG. 22 is an image that suggests that each operation is correct (for example, an image of a tous of standing up and making a gossip). Specifically, an animation image from when a sitting and thinking lady stands up and performs a gossip is displayed, and the final display image is an image larger than the start display image. Of course, the size of the operation correct image d20 may be made larger than the size of the operation specific image d10 in the middle of the animation. This is because the operation correct image d20 can be made to stand out.

  Further, the change from the operation specific image d10a to the operation correct image d20 is not limited to the above. For example, an option image is added to the operation specific image d10a (such as a flame or aura around a sitting you The operation correct image d20 may be generated by adding an image, and the operation correct image d20 larger than the operation specific image d10 a may be displayed. In addition, numbers may be written on the operation specifying image d10a using such characters to further clarify the operation order.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the insertion image d30 is gradually enlarged and moved from the top to the bottom of the screen to narrow the area in which the AT background image d2 and the operation correct image d20 are displayed. The method of enlarging and moving the area of the insertion image d30 is not limited to this.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 23A, the AT background image d2 and the operation correct image d20 are displayed by moving the insertion image d30 gradually from the four sides of the screen toward the center of the screen and enlarging and moving the region. The area may be narrowed. Also in this case, the operation correct image d20 can be emphasized and made to stand out. In FIG. 23, A20 indicates a region where the operation correct image d20 is displayed. Since the display area ratio between the AT background image d2 and the operation correct image d20 increases the ratio of the operation correct image d20 for each operation, the player does not show a sudden change, and the player prefers In some cases, the operation can be interrupted when the area ratio becomes, so that it is possible to achieve an effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 23B, first, the inserted image d30 is gradually enlarged and moved from the four sides of the screen toward the center of the screen to move the AT background image d2 and the operation correct image d20. By gradually enlarging and moving the next background image, the area of the normal background image d1 from the top to the bottom of the screen, the insertion image d30 and the operation correct image d20. You may make it narrow the area | region where is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the AT background image d2 and the normal background image d1 are not simultaneously displayed on the same screen, but the AT background image d2 and the normal background image d1 may be simultaneously displayed. . Of course, while the area of the AT background image d2 is gradually reduced, the area of the normal background image d1 is gradually expanded, and the normal background image d1 is finally displayed. Also in this case, the operation correct image d20 can be emphasized and made noticeable.

  As mentioned above, as long as the insertion image d30 contains the image which moves toward area | region A20 in which the operation correct image d20 is displayed in the one part, you may employ | adopt any movement aspect. This is because the background image outside the display area A20 of the operation correct image d20 narrows, and the operation correct image d20 can be emphasized and highlighted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation order of the correct answer when the internal winning combination is won is set as the first stop operation to the third stop operation, but the correct operation order is set only for the first stop operation. May be Then, when the operation order combination in which the operation condition is set to such first stop operation is internally won, the operation condition notification effect indicating the content of the correct first stop operation may be executed. .

  For example, when the first stop operation on the right stop button 139 is the correct operation, as shown in FIG. 24A, the operation specifying image d10 (for example, from right to left) indicating the contents of the first stop operation While displaying the image of the headed arrow, using the speakers 272 and 277, an audio (for example, an audio such as “press from the right”) indicating the content of the first stop operation is output, and various lamps 420 are used. Lighting and blinking (for example, lighting and blinking the right side lamp 144, etc.) indicating the content of the first stop operation are performed. Then, if the first stop operation is correct, the operation specific image d10 is erased, and the operation correct answer indicating that the first stop operation is correct in the area where the operation specific image d10 was displayed An image d20 (for example, an image in which a character such as OK is written in a frame of a predetermined shape) is displayed. Also in this case, since the operation correct image d20 is displayed larger than the operation specific image d10, the operation correct image d20 can be emphasized and highlighted.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the operation condition alerting | reporting effect | action which alert | reports the order of stop operation, it is good also as operation condition alerting | reporting effect which alert | reports the symbol of the small winning combination elected inside.

  For example, in the case of executing the operation condition notification effect when the small winning combination 2 (cherry) is internally won in the AT state, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the operation specifying image d10 showing the symbol of the internally winning combination While displaying (for example, an image of cherry) and using the speakers 272 and 277, an audio (for example, an audio such as "cherry") indicating the symbol of the winning combination is output using the various lamps 420. The color (for example, red) indicating the symbol of the internally winning combination is lighted. Then, when the operation timing is suitable and the cherry symbol is displayed on the pay line, the operation specific image d10 is deleted and the operation timing is correct in the area where the operation specific image d10 is displayed. An operation correct image d20 (for example, an image in which a character such as OK is written in a frame of a predetermined shape) indicating the image is displayed. Also in this case, since the operation correct image d20 is displayed larger than the operation specific image d10, the operation correct image d20 can be emphasized and highlighted.

  FIG. 25 is a view showing a modified example of the operation incorrect answer image d20a displayed when the operation is an incorrect answer in the operation condition notification effect. More specifically, when the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the AT state, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, the player performs an incorrect answer stop operation (first stop operation for the right stop button 139). Shows the transition of the operation condition notification effect when the

  As shown in FIG. 25, the operation incorrect image d20a may be displayed smaller than the operation specific image d10 (though not shown, the operation correct image d20 is larger than the operation specific image d10 in this modification as well. Is displayed). Here, FIG. 25 (a-2) is a display when the first stop operation is performed on the middle stop button 138 or the right stop button 139 instead of the left stop button 137, and FIG. 25 (a-4) Is a display when the second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop buttons, and FIG. 25 (a-6) is a display when the third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop buttons.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, instead of displaying all the operation specific images d10 (see FIG. 11), only the operation specific images d10 corresponding to the remaining stop operations may be displayed. In this modification, since the operation specific image d10 is displayed relatively larger than the operation incorrect image d20a, the remaining stop operation of the game is used as a practice for preventing operation failure for the next game and thereafter. be able to.

  In the AT state, information d40 such as the number of AT games may be displayed as an AT effect. FIG. 26 shows a case where such information d40 is displayed in a game for executing a state transition suggestion effect.

  FIG. 26A shows the transition of the effect image of the final game G1 in the normal state. In this case, after the third stop operation, the insertion image d30 covers the entire screen, and the display of the AT game number d40 is started when the final game G1 in the normal state is finished (FIG. 26 (a-5) reference). Information d40 indicating the number of AT games (for example, "AT 01 time" etc.) is displayed against the background of the insertion image d30 of plain coloration (repeated pattern is colored), so that the player can easily grasp the number of AT games it can. As described above, when transitioning from the normal state to the AT state, the number of AT games is started at the timing when the insertion image d30 covers the entire screen. During the AT state, the number of AT games is updated and displayed after the third stop operation is performed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 26B shows the transition of the effect image in the case where the operation sequence combination is internally won in the final game G2 in the normal state and the stop operation of the correct answer is performed. In this case, after the third stop operation, the insertion image d30 covers the entire screen, and when the final game G2 in the AT state ends, information d40 indicating that the AT state ends (for example, “END” or the like Is displayed (see FIG. 26 (b-6)). Information d40 (for example, "END" or the like) indicating the number of AT games is displayed against the background of the insertion image d30 of plain color arrangement, so that the player can easily grasp the change of the AT type gaming state. Although not shown, since the next game is in the normal state, the background image of the next game is the normal background image d1.

  In FIG. 26, the AT game number is displayed as the information d40, but the information d40 is not limited to this, and other numerical values related to the game (for example, the number of AT sets, winning of a specific small winning combination The number of times may be displayed.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the state transition suggestion effect is executed when the AT-type gaming state changes, but in addition to this, even when the AT-type gaming state does not change, the predetermined state When the condition is satisfied (for example, when winning an effect lottery to be performed every game) After a decision to change to the AT system gaming state, a precursor effect in a plurality of games before changing to the AT system gaming state In the case of execution as, etc.), the state transition suggestion effect may be performed. Even when the gaming state does not change, since the state transition suggestion effect can be shown to the player, it is possible to increase the opportunity to improve the sense of expectation for the change of the AT-based gaming state. 27 (a) shows the flow of the state transition suggestion effect performed when maintaining the normal state, and FIG. 27 (b) shows the flow of the state transition suggestion effect performed when the AT state is maintained. There is.

  As described above, even when the AT system gaming state does not change, the state transition suggestion effect may be executed to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the “sliding” moving from the top to the bottom of the screen is used as the insertion image d30, but it goes without saying that another image may be used as the insertion image d30. For example, as shown in FIG. 28, “shoji” may be used as the insertion image d30.

  FIG. 28 (a) shows a state transition suggestion effect in the final game G2 in the AT state where the AT background image d2 is displayed, and FIG. 28 (b) shows the AT state where the AT background image d2 is displayed In the final game G2 of the game, the small winning combination 3a is internally won, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the state transition suggestion effect when the player performs the correct stop operation (stop operation on the left middle right) And the operation condition notification effect is shown.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 28A, “Shoji” as the insertion image d30 moves from the left side to the right side of the screen, but moves only from the left end of the screen to the distance W11. . Then, the operation specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20 of the operation condition notification effect are displayed further to the right than the position of the distance W11 from the left end of the screen as shown in FIG. Even when the operation condition notification effect is simultaneously executed, the inserted image d30 does not disturb the operation specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20.

  Although not shown, when only the operation condition notification effect is executed in the AT state, the operation specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20 are displayed in the center of the screen with a predetermined size B1 (operation condition notification When the insertion image d30 is not displayed, the operation specifying image d10 for effect and the operation correct image d20 are displayed at the position (reference display position) shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the case of simultaneously executing the operation condition notification effect and the operation condition notification effect in the AT state, as shown in FIG. 28B, the operation specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20 are predetermined on the right side of the screen. The display is performed with a size B2 smaller than the size B1 (The operation specific image d10 for the operation condition notification effect and the operation correct image d20 do not overlap with the insertion image d30 when the insertion image d30 is displayed. It is displayed at the position to be displayed (the evacuation display position) .Furthermore, the display is reduced in an integrated manner so that the visual impression does not change.

  As described above, even if the movement direction of the insertion image d30 is the horizontal direction, the region of the insertion image d30 is enlarged and moved to approach the operation correct image d20, and the operation correct image d20 is displayed larger than the operation specific image d10. As a result, the operation correct image d20 can be emphasized and highlighted. The moving direction of the insertion image d30 is not limited to the vertical direction or the horizontal direction, and may be an oblique direction. Also in this case, the same display can be performed to emphasize the operation correct image d20 and make it stand out.

  In the game in which the state transition indication effect and the operation condition notification effect shown in FIG. 28 are simultaneously executed, the operation specific image d10 is displayed at the right end of the screen from the beginning (after the start lever operation) (FIG. 28) (Refer to (b-1).) In this case, it may be difficult to grasp the contents of the operation specific image d10. Therefore, as shown in FIG. (See FIG. 29 (a-1)), and when the minute time Δt (for example, about 0.05 seconds) elapses, a small display (displayed with a size B2) is displayed on the right end of the screen (FIG. 5) See also). In this case, the player can easily grasp the content of the stop operation of the correct answer.

  In addition, it is preferable to set it as the moving image which changes small gradually during micro time (DELTA) t as change of the operation specific image d10 (refer FIG. 29 (a-2)-(a-4)). This is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the operation correct image d20 is displayed larger than the operation specific image d10 to make the operation correct image d20 more noticeable, but in the present embodiment (the second embodiment), the operation specific The image d10 is displayed larger than the operation correct image d20 to make the operation specific image d10 more noticeable.

  In the following, configurations, functions, and processes different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the same components as those of the other configurations, functions, and processes will be assigned the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 30A is a diagram showing a notification mode of the operation condition notification effect of the present embodiment. The operation condition notification effect of the present embodiment displays the operation specifying image d10 indicating the order of the correct operation of stopping on the effect image display device 157, and uses the speakers 272 and 277 to execute the order of the correct operation of stopping the operation. A sound to be displayed (for example, a sound such as “left” if the next stop operation is the left stop button 137) is output, and various lamps 420 are used to turn on / blink (for example, to indicate the order of the correct stop operation) When the next stop operation is the left stop button 137, the left side lamp 144 is lighted / flickered).

  In the present embodiment, the operation specifying image d10 for the next stop operation is displayed larger than the operation specifying image d10 for the remaining stop operations so as to stand out. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation specifying image displayed in a large size is denoted as d10B, and the operation specifying image having a normal size is denoted as d10.

  Further, in the operation condition notification effect, (1) when the player performs the correct stop operation, the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the performed stop operation is erased, and the individual stop operations are correct (2) When the player performs an operation to stop the incorrect answer while displaying the operation correct image d20 that suggests the operation incorrect image d20a that suggests that each stop operation is incorrect. indicate. In the present embodiment, the operation specifying image d10B is displayed larger than the operation correct image d20.

  FIG. 30 (b) shows the case where the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the AT state and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs the correct stop operation (stop operation on the left middle right). The transition of the effect image of the operation condition notification effect of is shown.

  FIG. 30 (b-1) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. The slot machine 100 displays the operation specific image d10 based on the start lever operation. Specifically, when the correct stop operation is “left middle right”, the operation specific image d10B in which the number 1 is written in the square frame at the center lower position of the screen, inside the square frame The operation identification image d10 in which the number 2 is described, and the operation identification image d10 in which the number 3 is drawn in the rectangular frame are displayed from the left in alignment with the stop buttons 137 to 139. As described above, the operation specifying image d10b in which the numeral 1 is written is displayed larger than the operation specifying image d10 in which 2 and 3 are written. Thereby, the player operates the first stop operation on the left stop button 137, the second stop operation on the middle stop button 138, and the third stop operation on the right stop button 139 based on the arrangement of the numbers of the operation specific image d10. Understand that it is an operation for

  FIG. 30 (b-2) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. In (b-2) in FIG. 30, the player has made the operation on the left stop button 137 the first stop operation, and the first stop operation is correct. Therefore, the slot machine 100 performs the operation corresponding to the first stop operation. The specific image d10B is deleted, and the operation correct image d20 suggesting that the first stop operation is correct is displayed at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the first stop operation was displayed. Specifically, the operation correct image d20 is a graphic image of a shape representing explosion or rupture. In the present embodiment, the size of the operation correct image d20 is substantially the same as the size of the operation specific image d10. Further, since the next stop operation is the second stop operation, the slot machine 100 enlarges and displays the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation as the operation specific image d10B.

  FIG. 30 (b-3) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the first stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed). At this time, the slot machine 100 continues to display operation specific images d10B and d10 regarding the remaining stop operations (second stop operation and third stop operation) as the operation condition notification effect.

  FIG. 30 (b-4) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation. In FIG. 30 (b-4), the player has made the operation on the middle stop button 138 the second stop operation, and the second stop operation is correct. Therefore, the slot machine 100 specifies the operation corresponding to the second stop operation. The image d10B is deleted, and the operation correct image d20 suggesting that the second stop operation is correct is displayed at the position where the operation specific image d10B corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed. Further, since the next stop operation is the third stop operation, the slot machine 100 enlarges and displays the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation as the operation specific image d10B.

  FIG. 30 (b-5) shows the display mode of the output image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the second stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed). At this time, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specific image d10 regarding the remaining stop operation (third stop operation) as the operation condition notification effect.

  FIG. 30 (b-6) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. In (b-6) in FIG. 30, the player has made the operation to the right stop button 139 the third stop operation, and the third stop operation is correct. Therefore, the slot machine 100 specifies the operation corresponding to the third stop operation. The image d10B is deleted, and the operation correct image d20 suggesting that the third stop operation is correct is displayed at the position where the operation specific image d10B corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed.

  FIG. 30 (b-7) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the third stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 elapses). At this time, since the operation condition notification effect has ended, the slot machine 100 displays only the AT background image d2.

  FIG. 31 (a) is a time chart summarizing the relationship between the game operation and the operation specific image d10 and d10B described above. As described above, when the correct answer to the first stop operation is the operation to the left stop button 137, the operation specific image d10 marked “1” to the left stop button 137 is largely displayed as d10B from time t21 of the start lever operation. If the correct answer to the second stop operation is the operation on the middle stop button 138, the operation specific image d10 marked as "2" for the middle stop button 138 is largely displayed as d10B from time t22 of the first stop operation. If the correct answer to the third stop operation is an operation on the right stop button 139, the operation specific image d10 marked "3" for the right stop button 139 is largely displayed as d10B from time t24 of the second stop operation. Do.

  As a result, since the content of the correct stop operation is enlarged and displayed, the player can easily grasp the content of the next stop operation.

  FIG. 31 (b) is a diagram showing how the operation specific image d10 marked 2 corresponding to the second stop operation changes to d10B. Specifically, based on the first stop operation, the operation specifying image d10 described as 2 starts from the center coordinates of the operation specifying image d10 for a predetermined time L4 (about 0.1 seconds in this embodiment). The operation specific image d10B is enlarged.

  As described above, the operation condition notification effect of the present embodiment not only displays the operation specific image d10 to notify the player of advantageous operation content, but also performs another operation specific image d10B corresponding to the next stop operation. Since the display is made larger than the specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20 for emphasis, the player can more easily recognize the recommended next stop operation.

  The operation specific image d10 is displayed as a moving image (for example, the operation specific image d10 is displayed as an enemy character as part of the effect of defeating the enemy character), and the moving image before enlargement and the enlarged movement are differentiated. (For example, it may be a movie in which an enemy character prepares a weapon before enlargement, and a movie in which an enemy character wears a weapon after enlargement. It may be easier to recognize that there has been a change in size.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the enlarged operation specific image d10B is displayed so as not to overlap with the adjacent operation specific image d10, but may be displayed so as to overlap. However, in this case, in order to make the operation specific image d10B stand out, the operation specific image d10B is displayed in front of the operation specific image d10.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the enlarged operation specific image d10B is displayed as it is while maintaining the size, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation-specific image d10B that has once increased may be reduced, and the enlargement / reduction between the operation-specific image d10 and the operation-specific image d10B may be repeated. That is, it is sufficient that the operation specifying image d10B is displayed in at least a part of the display time L1. This is because it is possible to make the operation specific image d10B noticeable.

  FIG. 32 shows the case where the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the AT state, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs an incorrect answer stop operation (first stop operation for the right stop button 139). It shows the transition of the operation condition notification effect when done. Hereinafter, differences from the case of the stop operation of the correct answer will be mainly described.

  FIG. 32 (a-2) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. In FIG. 32 (a-2), since the player has made the operation to the right stop button 139 the first stop operation and the first stop operation is incorrect, the slot machine 100 is positioned above the operation specific images d10B and d10. In addition, an operation incorrect solution image d20a indicating that the first stop operation is incorrect is displayed at the center of the screen, and the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the first stop operation is continuously displayed.

  Here, the operation incorrectness image d20a is a graphic image in which a character of failure is described in a rectangular frame, and is an image which disappears after a predetermined time L1 from the start of the display, like the operation correct image d20. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation incorrect image d20a is displayed at a position different from the position where the operation correct image d20 was displayed, that is, the position where the operation specific image d10B corresponding to the first stop operation was displayed. .

  FIG. 32 (a-3) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation incorrect solution image d20 displayed based on the first stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 elapses). At this time, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specific images d10B and d10 regarding all the stop operations (first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation).

  32 (a-4) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation, and FIG. 32 (a-6) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. There is. The operation sequence of the correct answer in the present embodiment is so-called "six choices". Therefore, when the first stop operation is an incorrect answer, the second stop operation and the third stop operation become an incorrect answer. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a-4) and (a-6), the slot machine 100 does not perform the second stop operation and the third stop operation after the second stop operation and after the third stop operation, respectively. The operation incorrect solution image d20a indicating that it is the correct solution is displayed above the operation specific images d10B and d10 and at the center of the screen.

  As described above, the operation condition notification effect of the present embodiment displays the operation incorrect solution image d20a every time when performing an incorrect operation, and notifies that the operation is incorrect, so that the player Can easily recognize that an incorrect operation has been performed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the same operation incorrect answer image d20a was displayed with respect to each stop operation, it is not limited to this. A different operation incorrect image d20a may be displayed for each stop operation. For example, when the first stop operation fails, the largest operation incorrect image d20a among the three operation incorrect images d20a is displayed, and when the second stop operation fails, the three operation incorrect images The second largest operation incorrect image d20a of d20a is displayed, and when the third stop operation fails, the smallest operation incorrect image d20a of the three operation incorrect images d20a is displayed. Good. This is because the first stop operation is most important for the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the deletion timings of the operation incorrect solution image d20a and the operation specific image d10 based on the third stop operation are the same (FIG. 32 (a-6), (a-7)), but I will not. For example, the operation identification image d10 may be deleted prior to the operation incorrect image d20a. In this case, even if the operation specifying image d10 is deleted, since the operation incorrect answer image d20a is displayed, it may be impressed that the player has operated the incorrect answer. Also, for example, the operation incorrect image d20a may be deleted before the operation specific image d10. In this case, since the operation specific image d10 is displayed even if the operation incorrect image d20a is erased, it is possible to strongly impress the player on the correct operation stop operation sequence, and attention to the next operation condition notification effect is given. In some cases, it may be possible to

  Next, a case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are executed in the same game will be described. In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are simultaneously performed, the operation of each effect is the same as the case where it is performed independently. In other words, in any of the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect, the effect data in the case of executing independently and in the case of executing both effects are common, and the operations of the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect Is set in consideration of the case where both effects are simultaneously executed.

  FIG. 33 shows the case where the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the final game G2 in the AT state, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player has performed a correct stop operation (stop operation on the left middle right). The change of the production image (Operation specific image d10, d10B, the operation correct image d20) of the operation condition notification production at the time, and the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion performance is shown.

  FIG. 33 (a-1) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. After the start lever operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specific image d10B corresponding to the first stop operation and the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the remaining stop operations on the AT background image d2 based on the start lever operation. . In addition, after the start lever operation, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the inserted image d30 based on the start lever operation, and moves the area of the inserted image d30 downward from the upper side of the screen.

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the inserted image d30 when the predetermined time L2 elapses after the operation of the start lever, and thereafter continuously displays the moved image d30.

  FIG. 33 (a-2) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. The slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the first stop operation was displayed based on the first stop operation and further zooms the area of the insertion image d30 downward. Let In addition, the slot machine 100 enlarges and displays the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation as the operation specific image d10B.

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 elapses after the first stop operation, and subsequently displays the movement stoppage of the insertion image d30.

  FIG. 33 (a-3) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the first stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed).

  FIG. 33 (a-4) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation. The slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation was displayed based on the second stop operation and further zooms the area of the insertion image d30 downward. Let In addition, the slot machine 100 enlarges and displays the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation as the operation specific image d10B.

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 elapses after the second stop operation, and subsequently displays the movement-stopped insertion image d30.

  FIG. 33A-5 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the second stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 elapses).

  FIG. 33 (a-6) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. The slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation was displayed based on the third stop operation and further zooms the area of the insertion image d30 downward. Let

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the third stop operation, and subsequently displays the movement-stopped insertion image d30.

  FIG. 33 (a-7) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 when the enlargement movement of the insertion image d30 based on the third stop operation is completed, and the effect image display device 157 is the entire surface by the insertion image d30. Covered. Then, when a predetermined time L3 has elapsed from this state, the slot machine 100 erases the inserted image d30, and displays a normal background image d1 indicating that it is in the normal state on the effect image display device 157 (not shown). . As a result, the player can grasp that the normal state has been reached from the change of the background image.

  Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the insertion image d30 (see FIG. 14) immediately before the third stop operation does not hide the operation specific image d10B for the third stop operation. It is possible to reliably inform the player of the content of the operation specifying image d10 regarding the stop operation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of simultaneously executing the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect, as shown in FIG. 33, the insertion image d30 is directed to the operation specific image d10 and d10B and the operation correct image d20. As the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the next stop operation is enlarged and displayed as the operation specific image d10B while giving the impression that the peripheral area of the operation specific image d10 and d10B is narrowed by moving and expanding. The specific image d10B can be emphasized and highlighted.

<Other Modifications>
In the present embodiment (the second embodiment), the operation specifying images d10 and d10B and the operation correct image d20 are images of different materials. However, the operation specific images d10 and d10B and the operation correct image d20 may be expressed using the same material. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 34A, an image in which the operation specific image d10B is reduced while being rotated may be set as the operation correct image d20. In this case, the display time L1 of the operation correct image d20 is a time during which the operation specific image d10B is reduced while being rotated. Since the operation specific images d10 and d10B and the operation correct image d20 are expressed using the same material, the data volume of the image can be reduced.

  FIG. 34 (b) shows the case where the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the final game G2 in the AT state of this modification, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs the correct stop operation (left middle right 7 shows changes in effect images d10 and d10B of the operation condition notification effect and the inserted image d30 of the state transition indication effect when the stop operation of is performed.

  FIG. 34 (b-2) is after the first stop operation, FIG. 34 (b-4) is after the second stop operation, and FIG. 34 (b-6) is after the third stop operation. Are respectively shown. As shown in FIGS. 34 (a-2), (a-4) and (a-6), the operation specific image d10B corresponding to the performed stop operation is reduced while being rotated and is also made an operation correct image d20. Good. The player can grasp that the stop operation is correct from the aspect of the display change of the operation specifying image d10B.

  The configurations of the first embodiment and the second embodiment may be combined. That is, both of the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20 may be displayed large to make both the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20 stand out.

-Operation of inserted image d30 In the second embodiment described above, when the condition for performing state transition suggestion effects is satisfied, the "sliding" that is the inserted image d30 is displayed on the background image downward from above the screen for each game operation. Although the display image area is expanded by gradually drooping toward the screen to gradually shield the background image, the operation of the insertion image d30 is not limited to this. For example, at each game operation, the "sliding" which is the inserted image d30 gradually drops downward from above the screen on the background image, and then gradually rises upward from below the screen. It may move (Modification A).

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a change of the inserted image d30 displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the state transition suggestion effect according to the modification example A. FIG. 35 shows a state transition suggestion effect in the final game of the AT state in which the AT background image d2 is displayed.

  FIG. 35 (a-1) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 before the start lever operation, and FIG. 35 (a-2) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. The slot machine 100 starts the display of the inserted image d30 based on the start lever operation, and enlarges and moves the area of the inserted image d30 from the upper side of the screen to the lower side. Then, after the start lever operation, movement of the inserted image d30 is stopped when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 second) elapses, and the inserted image d30 is displayed on about 1/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157 Do. Thereafter, the insertion image d30 which has been stopped moving is continuously displayed. The lower limit position of the "sliding" which is the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the start lever operation is also referred to as the first position, and the state at this time is the case where the insertion image d30 is in the first state It is also called (state of FIG. 35 (a-2)).

  FIG. 35 (a-3) and (a-4) show the display modes of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. The slot machine 100 further zooms the area of the insertion image d30 in the first state downward based on the first stop operation. Then, after the first stop operation, movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 second) has elapsed, and the insertion image d30 is made about 2/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157 Display (time t1). The lower limit position of the "sliding" which is the insertion image d30 at time t1 is also referred to as a second position, and the state at this time is also referred to as the case where the insertion image d30 is in the second state (FIG. 35 (a-3) State of). After that, the slot machine 100 reduces the area of the insertion image d30 in the second state upward. Then, when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 seconds) has elapsed from time t1, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped, and the insertion image d30 is displayed on about 1/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157 ( Time point t2). That is, the insertion image d30 at time t2 is in the first state (state of FIG. 35 (a-4)). Thereafter, the insertion image d30 which has been stopped moving is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 35 (a-5) and (a-6) show the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation. The slot machine 100 enlarges and moves the area of the insertion image d30 in the first state downward based on the second stop operation. Then, after the first stop operation, movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 second) has elapsed, and the insertion image d30 is made about 2/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157 Display (time t3). That is, the insertion image d30 at time t3 is in the second state (state of FIG. 35 (a-5)). After that, the slot machine 100 reduces the area of the insertion image d30 in the second state upward. Then, when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed from time t3, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped, and the insertion image d30 is displayed on about 1/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157 (time t4). That is, the insertion image d30 at time t4 is in the first state (state of FIG. 35 (a-6)). Thereafter, the insertion image d30 which has been stopped moving is continuously displayed.

  35 (a-7) and (a-8) show the display modes of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. The slot machine 100 enlarges and moves the area of the insertion image d30 in the first state downward based on the third stop operation. Then, after the third stop operation, when the predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 second) has elapsed, the effect image display device 157 is entirely covered with the insertion image d30. Then, when a predetermined time L3 has elapsed from this state, the slot machine 100 erases the insertion image d30, and displays a normal background image d1 indicating that it is in the normal state on the effect image display device 157. As a result, the player can grasp that the normal state has been reached from the change of the background image.

  As described above, one movement of the insertion image d30 based on the game operation may be a reciprocating motion such that the area of the insertion image d30 is enlarged and reduced. The movement amount of the one insertion image d30 may be larger than the movement amount of the one insertion image d30 of the second embodiment.

  In the modification example A, the lower limit position of the “sliding” at the second position is a position covering about 2/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157, but the second position is not limited to this. The insertion image d30 may cover the entire display area of the effect image display device 157. That is, each time the stop operation is performed, the effect image display device 157 may be entirely covered with the insertion image d30.

  Next, in the modification A, a case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are executed in the same game will be described. Also in the present modification, in the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are simultaneously performed, the operation of each effect is the same as the case where it is performed independently.

  FIG. 36 shows the case where the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the final game G2 in the AT state, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player has performed the correct stop operation (stop operation on the left middle right). The change of the production image (Operation specific image d10, d10B, the operation correct image d20) of the operation condition notification production at the time, and the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion performance is shown.

  36A shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 before the start lever operation, and FIG. 36A shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. After the start lever operation, the slot machine 100 performs the enlarged display of the operation specific image d10B corresponding to the first stop operation on the AT background image d2 and the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the remaining stop operation based on the start lever operation. Start the display of. Also, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the inserted image d30 based on the start lever operation, and moves the area of the inserted image d30 downward from the upper side of the screen, and the lower limit reaches the first position. The movement of the inserted image d30 is stopped. Thereafter, the insertion image d30 in the first state is continuously displayed.

  FIGS. 36 (a-3) and (a-4) show the display modes of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. FIG. 36 (a-3) shows the case where the insertion image d30 is in the second state, and FIG. 36 (a-4) shows the case where the insertion image d30 is in the first state.

  The slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the first stop operation was displayed based on the first stop operation and the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation. Are enlarged and displayed as the operation specific image d10B (state of FIG. 36 (a-3)). Also, the slot machine 100 enlarges and moves the area of the insertion image d30 in the first state downward based on the first stop operation to the second state (state of FIG. 36 (a-3)). After that, the area of the insertion image d30 in the second state is reduced and moved upward to bring the insertion image d30 into the first state (state of FIG. 36 (a-4)). Thereafter, the insertion image d30 in the first state is continuously displayed.

  36 (a-5) and (a-6) show the display modes of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation. FIG. 36 (a-5) shows the case where the insertion image d30 is in the second state, and FIG. 36 (a-6) shows the case where the insertion image d30 is in the first state.

  The slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation was displayed based on the second stop operation and the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation. Are enlarged and displayed as the operation specific image d10B (state of FIG. 36 (a-5)). Also, the slot machine 100 enlarges and moves the area of the insertion image d30 in the first state downward based on the second stop operation to the second state (state of (a-5) in FIG. 36). After that, the area of the insertion image d30 in the second state is reduced and moved upward to bring the insertion image d30 into the first state (state of FIG. 36 (a-6)). Thereafter, the insertion image d30 in the first state is continuously displayed. The operation of the insertion image d30 is the same as the operation based on the first stop operation.

  36 (a-7) and (a-8) show display modes of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. The slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation was displayed based on the third stop operation, and at the same time, the slot image 100 of the first state. The area is expanded downward and the entire screen is entirely covered with the insertion image d30 (state of (a-7) in FIG. 36). Then, when a predetermined time L3 has elapsed from this state, the slot machine 100 erases the insertion image d30, and displays a normal background image d1 indicating a normal state on the effect image display device 157 (FIG. 36 (a State of 8)).

  As described above, when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are simultaneously performed in the modification A, the insertion image d30 is enlarged and moved toward the operation specific images d10 and 10B, and the peripheral region of the operation specific images d10 and d10B is Since an operation-specific image d10 corresponding to the next stop operation is enlarged and displayed as the operation-specific image d10B while giving an impression that it has become narrow, the operation-specific image d10B can be emphasized and highlighted. In particular, in the modified example A, the movement amount of one insertion image d30 is larger than that in the second embodiment, so the operation specific image d10B can be emphasized and made more noticeable.

  In the modification A, as shown in FIGS. 36 (a-3) and (a-5), when the display area of the operation specific images d10 and 10B and the display area of the insertion image d30 overlap, the operation specific image Since d10B is displayed in the foreground, the operation specific image 10B can be made to stand out.

  In addition, in the modification example A, one reciprocation movement with enlargement and reduction of the insertion image d30 is performed once for each stop operation. However, the reciprocating movement accompanied with enlargement and reduction of the inserted image d30 based on the game operation is not limited to one. For example, the reciprocating movement accompanied with enlargement and reduction of the inserted image d30 may be repeatedly performed a plurality of times based on the game operation (modification A1). By repeatedly performing the reciprocating movement accompanied by the enlargement and reduction of the insertion image d30 a plurality of times, the player can pay attention to the background image and the operation specifying images d10 and d10B shielded by the insertion image d30.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a change in the insertion image d30 displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the state transition suggestion effect according to the modification A1. FIG. 37 shows a state transition suggestion effect in the final game of the AT state in which the AT background image d2 is displayed.

  FIG. 37 shows a case where the reciprocating movement accompanied with enlargement and reduction of the insertion image d30 is repeated until the third stop operation based on the start lever operation. In the modification A1, the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are performed in the same game, and, for example, the reciprocating movement accompanied by enlargement and reduction of the insertion image d30 a plurality of times based on the start lever operation When starting the repeated operation, the reciprocating movement of the insertion image d30 is not based on the stop operation, so the timing of enlarging the operation specific image d10B and the start of enlargement of the region of the insertion image d30 are started based on the stop operation. There may be cases where the timings to perform are not simultaneous. That is, after the display of the insertion image d30 is started, when the operation specific image d10B is enlarged while the insertion image d30 is enlarged and moved, or after the display of the insertion image d30 is started, the insertion image d30 is reduced and moved. There may be a case where the operation specific image d10B is magnified during the process.

  In the second embodiment and the modified examples A and A1, although the insertion image d30 is started to be displayed triggered by the start lever operation, the display start of the insertion image d30 is not limited to this. For example, the display of the insertion image d30 may be started based on the third stop operation of the previous game. That is, the display start timing of the insertion image d30 and the display start timing of the operation specific images d10 and d10B may not be simultaneous.

  Moreover, in the modification example A, although the insertion image d30 is an image of "sliding", the insertion image d30 is not limited to this. For example, the inserted image d30 may be an image of a fluid such as "water spray", "smoke", "flame" or "aura". That is, an image that repeats such enlargement and reduction of the fluid may be used as the insertion image d30. Hereinafter, a case where the insertion image d30 is an image of “water spray” in the modification A will be described (modification B).

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a change of the inserted image d30 displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the state transition suggestion effect according to the modification example B. As shown in FIG. FIG. 38 shows a state transition suggestion effect in the final game of the AT state in which the AT background image d2 is displayed.

  38 (a-1) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 before the start lever operation, and FIGS. 38 (a-2) and (a-3) show the display of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation The aspect is shown. The slot machine 100 starts the display of the inserted image d30 based on the start lever operation, and enlarges and moves the area of the inserted image d30 from the upper side of the screen to the lower side. Then, after the start lever operation, movement of the inserted image d30 is stopped when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 second) elapses, and the inserted image d30 is displayed on about 1/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157 To do (time t1). The lower limit position of “water spray” which is the insertion image d30 at time t1 is also referred to as a third position. Further, the state at this time is also referred to as the case where the insertion image d30 is in the third state (state of FIG. 38 (a-2)). Thereafter, the slot machine 100 reduces the area of the insertion image d30 in the third state up and down. Then, when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 seconds) has elapsed from time t1, the movement of the inserted image d30 is stopped, and the inserted image d30 is displayed in about 1/6 of the display area of the effect image display device 157 ( Time point t2). The lower limit position of “water spray” which is the insertion image d30 at time t2 is also referred to as a fourth position. The state at this time is also referred to as the case where the insertion image d30 is in the fourth state.

  Thus, in the modified example B, based on the operation of the start lever, the “water spray” that is the inserted image d30 performs a reciprocating motion in the vertical direction such that a wave approaches and draws. When the inserted image d30 is "water spray", unlike the case where the inserted image d30 is "sliding", the boundary portion between the AT background image d2 and the inserted image d30 is not clear. It is possible to visually recognize both the AT background image d2 and the insertion image d30 while being vague.

  38 (a-4) and (a-5) show the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation, and FIGS. 38 (a-6) and (a-7) show the display mode after the second stop operation. Although the display mode of the effect image display device 157 is shown, the operation of the insertion image d30 after each stop operation is the same as the operation of the insertion image d30 after the start lever operation, so the description will be omitted. That is, based on each stop operation, the "water spray" which is the insertion image d30 performs the reciprocation motion which an wave draws and pulls up and down.

  38 (a-8), (a-9) and (a-10) show display modes of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. The slot machine 100 enlarges and moves the area of the insertion image d30 in the fourth state downward based on the third stop operation (state in FIG. 38A-8). Then, when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the third stop operation, the effect image display device 157 is entirely covered with the insertion image d30 (state of (a-9) in FIG. 38). Then, when a predetermined time L3 has elapsed from this state, the slot machine 100 erases the insertion image d30, and displays a normal background image d1 indicating that it is in the normal state on the effect image display device 157 (FIG. 10) condition). As a result, the player can grasp that the normal state has been reached from the change of the background image.

  Next, in the modification B, the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are executed in the same game will be described. Also in the present modification, in the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are simultaneously performed, the operation of each effect is the same as the case where it is performed independently.

  FIG. 39 shows the case where the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the final game G2 in the AT state, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player has performed the correct stop operation (stop operation on the left middle right). The change of the production image (Operation specific image d10, d10B, the operation correct image d20) of the operation condition notification production at the time, and the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion performance is shown.

  39 (a-1) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 before the start lever operation, and FIGS. 39 (a-2) and (a-3) show the display of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation The aspect is shown. After the start lever operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specific image d10B corresponding to the first stop operation and the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the remaining stop operations on the AT background image d2 based on the start lever operation. . Also, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the inserted image d30 based on the start lever operation, and moves the inserted image d30 downward from the upper side of the screen to a third state (FIG. 39 (a-2) After that, it is reduced and moved upward from the third state to the fourth state (state of FIG. 39 (a-3)).

  As described above, in the modification example B, since the insertion image d30 moves in enlargement and reduction toward the d10B, it can give an impression that the peripheral area of the operation identification image 10B is narrowed, and the operation identification image d10B is emphasized. can do.

  Note that the operation of the inserted image d30 in FIG. 39 (a-4) and thereafter is the same as the operation shown in FIG. 38, and the operations of the operation specific images d10 and 10B are the same as the operation of modification A. Therefore, the description will be omitted hereinafter.

  In the modified example B, the “water spray” which is the insertion image d30 is generated at the upper side, expanded and moved from the upper side to the lower side, and reduced and moved from the lower side to the upper side. As described above, "water spray" which is the insertion image d30 is generated on the four sides of the outer periphery of the effect image display device 157, enlarged from each of the four outer sides toward the center, and reduced from the center toward the four outer sides. It is also good. When the inserted image d30 is "water spray", the boundary portion between the AT background image d2 and the inserted image d30 is not clear, so the player confirms the information displayed in the AT background image d2 while ambiguously It becomes possible.

  Further, the generation source of “water spray” which is the insertion image d30 is not limited to the periphery of the effect image display device 157. For example, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), when the operation specific images d10 and d10B are displayed above the screen, "water spray", which is the inserted image d30, is generated at the center of the screen and upward from the center of the screen The enlargement and reduction movement may be performed toward the operation specific images d10 and d10B. That is, as long as the "water spray" which is the insertion image d30 reciprocates toward the display position of the operation specific images d10 and d10B, it may be generated from any position.

  Although there is no overlap between the operation specific images d10 and 10B and the insertion image d30 in FIG. 40 (b), the two display areas may overlap. In this case, the operation specifying images d10 and 10B are displayed in front of the insertion image d30 to make the operation specifying images d10 and 10B more prominent than the insertion image d30. On the other hand, even if the operation-specific image d10B and the insertion image d30 overlap, if the display area of the operation-specific image 10B not overlapping the insertion image d30 is larger than the display area of the entire operation-specific image 10, the insertion image You may display d30 in front of the operation identification image 10B. Also in this case, the operation specific image d10B can be made conspicuous.

  FIG.40 (c) has shown the enlarged view of "water spray" which is the insertion image d30. Thus, in the modified example B, the change of "water spray" is large on the side closer to the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the movement direction of the insertion image d30 (for example, near the operation specific image d10), and "water spray" exists While there is no change in “water spray” on the side far away from the operation specific images d10 and d10 B (for example, the peripheral portion of the screen), an image is displayed in which “water spray” is always present It will be That is, in the modified example B, the change in the display area of the inserted image d30 is large on the side closer to the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the moving direction of the inserted image d30, and on the side farther from the operation specific images d10 and d10B, the inserted image The change in the display area of d30 is small.

  In addition, in the modification B, one reciprocation movement with enlargement and reduction of the insertion image d30 was performed once for each game operation. However, the reciprocating movement accompanied with enlargement and reduction of the inserted image d30 based on the game operation is not limited to one. For example, the reciprocating movement of enlargement and reduction of the inserted image d30 may be repeatedly performed a plurality of times based on the game operation (Modification B1).

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a change in the insertion image d30 displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the state transition suggestion effect according to the modification B1. FIG. 41 shows the state transition suggestion effect in the final game of the AT state in which the AT background image d2 is displayed, and "water spray" which is the inserted image d30 occurs on the four peripheral sides of the effect image display device 157 The case is shown.

  FIG. 41 shows a case where movement accompanied by enlargement and reduction of the insertion image d30 is repeated a plurality of times based on the start lever operation. In this modification B1, based on the medal insertion operation of the next game, the reciprocating movement accompanied with enlargement and reduction of the insertion image d30 is stopped, and the insertion image d30 disappears. In addition, with reciprocating movement accompanied by expansion and contraction of the insertion image d30, the state of FIG. 41 (a-2) is repeated in addition to the state of FIG. 41 (a-1) and FIG. 41 (a-2). It may be something. In this case, the tip of the "water spray" (the direction toward the center of the screen), which is the inserted image d30, disappears, and then "water spray" is generated again at the lost portion. That is, it may be reciprocating movement accompanied by enlargement of the display area of the insertion image d30 and disappearance of a part of the display area of the insertion image d30.

  In the modification B1, when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are performed in the same game, for example, an operation of repeating the reciprocating movement accompanied by enlargement and reduction of the inserted image d30 multiple times based on the start lever operation Since the reciprocation accompanied by the enlargement and reduction of the inserted image d30 is not based on the stop operation when starting the operation, the timing of enlarging and displaying the operation specific image d10B based on the stop operation and the timing of starting enlargement of the region of the inserted image d30 May not occur simultaneously. That is, after the display of the insertion image d30 is started, when the operation specific image d10B is enlarged while the insertion image d30 is enlarged and moved, or after the display of the insertion image d30 is started, the insertion image d30 is reduced and moved. There may be a case where the operation specific image d10B is magnified during the process.

  Further, in the modified examples B and B1, although the display of the insertion image d30 is started in response to the start lever operation, the display start of the insertion image d30 is not limited to this. For example, the display of the insertion image d30 may be started based on the third stop operation of the previous game. That is, the display start timing of the insertion image d30 and the display start timing of the operation specific images d10 and d10B may not be simultaneous.

Type of Operation Specific Image d10 Although the type of the operation specific image d10 is one type in the second embodiment, a plurality of types of operation specific images d10 may be provided separately. For example, different operation specific images d10 may be displayed according to the presentation state (Modification C).

  In the following modifications C to G, unlike in the state transition diagram of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 6, in the case of being internally elected to the special combination in RT2 (AT state), RT3 (normal state) It will be described on the premise that the state becomes RT3 (AT state). In this case, when the number of AT games is digested in RT3 (AT state), RT3 (normal state) is obtained. RT3 (AT state) is a gaming state more advantageous than RT2 (AT state).

  FIG. 42 shows an operation identification image d10 according to the modification C. Specifically, the rendering state 1 is RT2 (AT state), and the rendering state 2 is RT3 (AT state). That is, in the modification C, the operation specific images d10 and d10B which are character images are displayed in the more advantageous rendering state 2 in which the special winning combination is internally won even in the same AT state, and the internal winning combination is not the special winning combination. In the effect state 1, operation specific images d10 and d10B of numeric images are displayed. Further, the sizes of the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the effect state 2 are larger than the sizes of the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the effect state 1.

  As a result, since the operation condition informing effect of the effect state 2 is made more noticeable than the operation condition informing effect of the effect state 1, the player can see more by looking at the type and size of the operation specific image d10. It can be determined whether it is in an advantageous state. Further, when the operation specific images d10 and d10B are made larger, it is possible to reduce the stop operation error.

  In addition, in the modification C, although the operation condition alerting production at the time of being internally elected to the small winning combination 3a in AT state was demonstrated, the opportunity which performs the operation condition alerting production of a different kind is not limited to this. For example, in the case of having a normal replay role and a special replay role (a position advantageous to the player), when the internal replay is won by the normal replay role, the operation specific image d10 of the numeric image of the normal size And d10B may be displayed, and when a special replay player combination is internally won, operation specific images d10 and d10B of a large character image may be displayed. That is, in accordance with the result of the winning combination internal lottery process, the operation specific image d10 which is larger than normal is selected when an advantageous combination (for example, a combination that can be expected to be added to AT in AT) can be internally won. And d10B may be displayed, and otherwise, operation specific images d10 and 10B of normal size may be displayed. The player can determine from the image of the operation condition notification effect whether or not an advantageous situation is to be achieved.

  Furthermore, different types of operation condition notification effects may be executed according to the number of digested games. For example, in the last 5 games in the AT state, the operation specific images d10 and d10B larger than normal are displayed, and in the period other than the last 5 games in the AT state, the operation specific images d10 and 10B of normal size are displayed You may do it. Further, different types of operation condition notification effects may be executed according to the flow of the effects. For example, in a scene where a match is decided in a confrontation scene of background image d2, operation specific images d10 and d10B larger than normal are displayed, and in other scenes, operation specific images d10 and d of normal sizes are displayed. You may do so.

  43A and 43B are effect images (operation specific images d10 and d10B) of the operation condition notification effect when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the same game in the modification C It is a figure which shows the insertion image d30 of and a state transition suggestion effect. More specifically, FIG. 43A shows the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect in the effect state 1 when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are executed in the effect state 2. It shows the case of execution.

  In the modified example C, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), in the effect state 2, since the operation specific image d10B and the insertion image d30 overlap, the operation specific image d10B is displayed in front of the insertion image d30, The operation specific image d10B is made more noticeable.

  A pivoting operation may be added to the operation specifying images d10 and d10B of the modified example C. For example, as shown in FIGS. 43C and 43D, the operation specifying images d10 and d10B may be turned to the left and right. FIG. 43 (c) executes the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect in the effect state 1 when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are performed in the effect state 2 The case is shown. In this case, since the turning operation of the operation specifying images d10 and d10B in the effect state 2 is larger in swing than the turning operation of the operation specifying images d10 and d10B in the effect state 1, the player operates the operation specifying images d10 and d10B. It can be grasped whether it is a more advantageous state from the size of and the size of the shaking.

  In addition, when the operation specific images d10 and d10B are largely shaken, the AT background image d2 present behind the operation specific images d2 is more easily visible to the player than when the operation is small, so that the AT background image d2 is easily recognized. May be

-Type and operation of insertion image d30 In the second embodiment, although the operation of the "sliding" image which is the insertion image d30 is one type, the operation of a plurality of types of insertion images d30 is separately provided. May be For example, the operation of the different insertion image d30 may be displayed depending on the effect state (Modification D).

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the difference in the operation of the inserted image d30 when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are performed in the same game in the modification D.

  In the modification D, as shown in FIG. 44, in the effect state 2 which is more advantageous than the effect state 1, the movement amount of the inserted image d30 based on the game operation is increased. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by viewing the amount of movement of the inserted image d30.

  In the modification D, the movement amount is made different as the operation of the insertion image d30, but the movement speed may be changed along with the movement amount. For example, in the effect state 2 which is more advantageous than the effect state 1, the moving amount and moving speed of the insertion image d30 based on the game operation may be increased.

  In the modification D as well as the modification C, not only the effect state but also (1) the result of the internal winning lottery process, (2) the number of digested games, and (3) the flow of the effect, The moving amount of the image d30 may be changed.

  Further, the modification C and the modification D may be combined (modification E). FIG. 45 shows an image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are performed in the same game in the modification E. Specifically, FIG. 45 (a) shows the insertion image d30 and the operation specifying images d10 and d10B in the effect state 2, and FIG. 45 (b) shows the insertion image d30 and the operation specifying images d10 and d10 B in the effect state 1. Is shown.

  As described above, in the effect state 2, as compared with the effect state 1, the movement amount of the insertion image d30 may be increased and the operation specific images d10 and d10B may be displayed larger. The player can determine whether or not it is in an advantageous state by looking at the amount of movement of the inserted image d30 and the sizes of the operation specific images d10 and d10B.

  In addition, although the color or pattern of the insertion image d30 is one type in the second embodiment, the insertion image d30 of a different color or pattern may be displayed according to the presentation state (Modification F).

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a difference in color of the inserted image d30 when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are performed in the same game in the modification F. Here, FIG. 46A shows the insertion image d30 and the operation identification images d10 and d10B in the effect state 2, and the insertion image d30 is red. On the other hand, FIG. 46 (b) shows the insertion image d30 and the operation specifying images d10 and d10B in the effect state 1, and the insertion image d30 is brown.

  As described above, in the effect state 2, compared to the effect state 1, the color of the insertion image d30 may be more noticeable. The player can determine whether or not it is in an advantageous state by looking at the color or pattern of the inserted image d30.

  In the modification F, as in the modification C, not only the effect state but also (1) as a result of the internal winning combination lottery process, (2) the number of digested games, and (3) according to the flow of the effect, The color or pattern of the image d30 may be changed.

  Further, the modification example F and the modification example C may be combined (modification example G). FIG. 47 shows an image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition indication effect are performed in the same game in the modification G. Specifically, FIG. 47 (a) shows the insertion image d30 and the operation specifying images d10 and d10B in the effect state 2, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the insertion image d30 and the operation specifying images d10 and d10 B in the effect state 1. Is shown.

  As described above, in the effect state 2, compared with the effect state 1, the color of the insertion image d30 may be made more noticeable and the operation specific images d10 and d10B may be displayed larger. The player can determine whether or not it is in an advantageous state by looking at the color of the inserted image d30 and the sizes of the operation specific images d10 and d10B.

  In addition, in the effect state 2, the color of the insertion image d30 may be changed for each game operation. For example, white may be changed based on the start lever operation, yellow based on the first stop operation, green based on the second stop operation, and red based on the third stop operation.

  FIG. 48 (a) is an example showing the relationship between the color of the insertion image d30 and the degree of expectation. As described above, the insertion images d30 of a plurality of colors having different degrees of expectation may be provided. FIG. 48B is a table showing the probability that each operation specific image d10 is selected in the case of displaying the operation specific image d10 of a number or a character, using the color of the inserted image d30 shown in FIG. 48A. It is. For example, in the case of displaying a brown inserted image d30 with a low to moderate expectation, the probability that a numeric operation specific image d10 is selected is 90%, and the probability that a character operation specific image d10 is selected is 10% On the other hand, when displaying a golden insert image d30 with high expectation, the probability that the operation specific image d10 of the number is selected is 10%, and the probability that the operation specific image d10 of the character is selected is 90%. It has become. That is, when the insertion image d30 of a color with a high degree of expectation is displayed, the probability that the operation specific image d10 of the character indicating an advantageous state is displayed may be increased.

Third Embodiment
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the insertion image d30 is displayed on one background image to gradually shield and reduce the area of one background image and enlarge its own display area. Finally, after the entire screen has been made into the insertion image d30, it is switched to another background image and displayed. However, in the third embodiment, one background image is gradually made difficult to be recognized by gradually mixing the insertion image into one background image (an image obtained by mixing one background image and the insertion image is a screen Finally, the percentage of one background image is 0%, the percentage of the inset image d30 is 100%, the entire screen is made the inset image d30, and then the other background image is switched and displayed. . As described above, also in the method of gradually making the one background image unclear and gradually clarifying the insertion image d30, the display area (display area) of the one background image is gradually reduced and the insertion image d30 is made. It can be considered as one method of gradually enlarging the display area (display area) of. While switching from the background image to the insertion image d30, there are cases in which both the background image of the entire screen and the insertion image d30 of the entire screen can be recognized.

  In the following, configurations, functions, and processes different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the same components as those of the other configurations, functions, and processes will be assigned the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 49 shows the case where the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the final game G2 in the AT state of the present embodiment (third embodiment) and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs the stop operation of the correct answer ( The change of the production image (the operation specific image d10, the operation correct image d20) of the operation condition informing effect when performing the left middle right stop operation) and the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect is shown. Here, specifically, the insertion image d30 is an image like a sandstorm shown in FIG. 49 (a-6).

  In the present embodiment, the inserted image d30 is mixed each time a game operation (start lever operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation). As a method of this mixing, a method of increasing the insertion image d30 at a constant rate each time the operation is suitable, for example, increasing the mixing ratio of the insertion image d30 from 0% to 25% based on the start lever operation (AT The mixing ratio of background image d2 is reduced from 100% to 75%), and the mixing ratio of inserted image d30 is increased from 25% to 50% based on the first stopping operation (the mixing ratio of AT background image d2 is 75% to 50%) Up to 50% to 75% of the mixing ratio of the inserted image d30 based on the second stopping operation (reducing the mixing ratio of the AT background image d2 from 50% to 25%), and the inserting image based on the third stopping operation There is a method of increasing the mixing ratio of d30 from 75% to 100% (reducing the mixing ratio of AT background image d2 from 25% to 0%).

  In this embodiment, a mixed image d2 & d30 in which the AT background image d2 and the insertion image d30 are mixed is displayed on the entire screen, but only the area of the effect image (operation specific image d10, operation correct image d20) of the operation condition notification effect Is an exception. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, since the operation specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20 are clearly displayed, the player should accurately grasp the operation content to be notified and whether or not the operation performed was correct. Can.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the content of the background image d2 gradually becomes difficult to visually recognize by gradually increasing the mixing ratio of the insertion image d30. You can emphasize it gradually and make it stand out.

  Of course, also in the present embodiment, the operation correct image d20 is displayed larger than the operation specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20 is displayed in front of the operation specific image d10. You can

<Other Modifications>
As shown in FIG. 50, the mixed image d2 & d30 may not be displayed in the entire rectangular area A20 including the areas of the operation specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20 (the third stop operation after the start lever operation) Until the display of the operation correct image d20 based on Also in this case, the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20 can be emphasized gradually and made to stand out. Here, FIG. 50 (a) is a case where the small winning combination 3a is internally won in the final game G2 in the AT state and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs the correct stop operation (left middle right The change of the production image (the operation specific image d10, the operation correct image d20) of the operation condition notification production when the stop operation is performed, and the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion production is shown. FIG. 50 (b) is a diagram showing in detail the positional relationship between the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20 and the rectangular region A20.

  The fact that the third stop operation is the correct operation in FIG. 50 is determined by the fact that both the first stop operation and the second stop operation are correct operations. That is, it can be determined that the operation correct image d20 after the first stop operation and the operation correct image d20 after the second stop operation are images that suggest the operation correct of the third stop operation. Therefore, in the entire rectangular area A20 including the areas of the operation specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20, the mixed image d2 & d30 is not displayed after the third stop operation (without waiting for the end of the display of the operation correct image d20) You may

  Further, the configuration of the second embodiment may be incorporated into the present embodiment (third embodiment). That is, instead of displaying the operation correct image d20 larger than the operation specific image d10, the operation specific image d10 may be displayed larger than the operation correct image d20. The operation specific image d10 can be highlighted.

Fourth Embodiment
In the internal lottery in which the combination of the slot machines is determined, lottery data corresponding to set values (specifically, set values 1 to 6) are used. For example, there is a game console in which a difference is made to the winning probability of a small winning combination according to the setting value (Japanese Patent No. 6063591).

  If there is a difference in the winning probability of the small winning combination according to the set value, there is a pleasure to guess the set value while advancing the game. However, if there is a difference in the winning probability of the small winning combination according to the set value, it is desirable that the difference be such that the set value can be predicted when the player plays a game for a long time. In other words, it is not preferable that the setting value is predicted in the short-time game, since the long-time game of the player can not be expected.

  The gaming machine of the present embodiment is a gaming machine which makes it difficult to estimate the setting value in a short game even if a difference is given to the winning probability of the small winning combination according to the setting value.

<Overall configuration>
FIG. 51 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 1100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention. The slot machine 1100 shown in FIG. 51 corresponds to an example of a game table according to the present invention, and comprises a main body 1101 and a front door 1102 attached to the front of the main body 1101 and openable and closable relative to the main body 1101. . Three reels (left reel 1110, middle reel 1111, right reel 1112) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored inside the center of the main body 1101 and rotated inside the slot machine 1100. It is configured to be able to. The reels 1110 to 1112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined cylindrical frame member to constitute the reels 1110 to 1112. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1110 to 1112 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1113, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1110 to 1112, the combination of symbols to be viewed by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 1110 to 1112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. Note that as such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted other than the reel. Further, although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1100 in the present embodiment, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A back light (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1113 is disposed on the back of each of the reels 1110 to 1112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light emitter and a light receiver is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1110 to 1112. The light emitter of this optical sensor is provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. The position in the rotational direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 1110 to 1112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

  The pay line display lamp 1120 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1114 to be activated. The pay lines to be valid (hereinafter, also referred to as valid lines) are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media.

  In the present embodiment, five pay lines of a middle horizontal pay line, an upper horizontal pay line, a lower horizontal pay line, an upper right pay line, and a lower right pay line are set.

  The slot machine 1100 of the present embodiment is a gaming table dedicated to betting on three pieces, and when the number of medals inserted (number of bets) reaches a prescribed number (three pieces), the above-mentioned five pay lines become effective. When the pay line is activated, the start lever 1135 can be operated to start the game. The number of pay lines is not limited to five. In addition, it is not necessary to be a game stand dedicated to betting on 3 pieces, and a number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as a valid pay line.

  The notification lamp 1123 indicates, for example, that the player is internally elected to a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) in a winning combination internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The game medal insertable lamp 1124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1122 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of a medal is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1128 is a lamp for effect.

  The bet buttons 1130-1132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1100. In the present embodiment, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the bet button 1130 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 1131 is pressed, and three sheets are inserted when the bet button 1132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 1132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1129 turns on a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1121 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1141 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 1130-1132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1141, and the term "insertion" includes both. is there.

  The stored number display 1125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1100. The game information display 1126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during the bonus game) in numerical values. The payout amount display 1127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the storage quantity indicator 1125, the game information indicator 1126, and the payout quantity indicator 1127 are constituted by seven segment (SEG) indicators. Note that the payout amount display 1127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that reports information related to the stop operation (for example, the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139).

  The start lever 1135 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1110 to 1112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1141 or the bet buttons 1130 to 1132 are operated to operate the start lever 1135, the reels 1110 to 1112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1135 is referred to as the game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1136 is provided with stop buttons 1137 to 1139. The stop buttons 1137 to 1139 are button-type press switches for individually stopping the reels 1110 to 1112 that have started to rotate by the operation of the start lever 1135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 1110 to 1112 . More specifically, the left reel 1110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 1137, the middle reel 1111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 1138, and the right stop button 1139 The right reel 1112 can be stopped by operating.

  Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel to be subjected to a second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel to be subjected to a third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 for stopping all the rotating reels 1110 to 1112 are stopped is referred to as the operation order or the pressing order. The operation sequence in which the first stop reel is the left reel 1110 is called “forward press operation sequence” or simply “forward press”, and the operation sequence in which the first stop reel is the right reel 1112 is “stop operation”. The reverse pressing operation order "or simply" reverse pressing ". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139, and when the operation of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 is possible, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The navigation generation state notification lamp 1190 is a lamp that lights up when the game control state of the main control unit 1300 is in either navigation generation state 1 or 2 described below (hereinafter referred to as “in navigation generation state”). The player can grasp that the navigation is generated from the lighting mode of the navigation generation state notification lamp 1190.

  The medal return button 1133 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1134 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1100 and the bet medals and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1155. The door key hole 1140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1102 of the slot machine 1100 is inserted. The medal payout opening 1155 is a payout opening for paying out medals.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 1136, a title panel 1162 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of certificate cards is provided. At the lower part of the title panel 1162, a medal payout port 1155 and a medal receiver 1161 are provided.

  The sound hole 1181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1100 to the outside. Side lamps 1144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1102 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. A rendering device 1160 is disposed above the front door 1102, and a sound hole 1143 is provided above the rendering device 1160. The effect device 1160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1163 including two right shutters 1163 a and a left shutter 1163 b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1163. When the right shutter 1163a and the left shutter 1163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1157 (not shown) is the front of the slot machine 1100 (game It has a structure that appears on the

  The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 1157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that reports information related to the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139).

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole can be viewed by the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

<Inside the case>
FIG. 52 is a front view showing the slot machine 1100 with the front door 1102 opened. The main body 1101 is a box which is surrounded by the upper surface plate 1261, the left side surface plate 1260, the right side surface plate 1260, the lower surface plate 1264 and the back surface plate 1242 and is opened in the front surface. A main control board storage case 1210 containing a main control board is disposed inside the main body 1101 at a position not overlapping the air vent 1249 provided at the upper portion of the back plate 1242. Below the three reels 1110 to 1112 are arranged. The first control sub board is housed in the side of the main control board storage case 1210 and the reels 1110 to 1112, that is, on the left side plate 1260, the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit inside A case 1220 is provided. An external concentrated terminal plate 1248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 1100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 1260 on the right side.

  A medal payout device 1180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower surface plate 1264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 1180, that is, below the reels 1110 to 1112. A power supply device 1252 is disposed, and a power switch 1244 is disposed on the front of the power supply device 1252. The power switch 1244 can be operated by opening the front door 1102, and in the closed state, the operation is difficult or impossible.

  The power supply device 1252 converts AC power supplied to the slot machine 1100 from the outside into a DC voltage, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts it into a predetermined voltage, such as a main control unit 1300, a first auxiliary control unit 1400, and a second auxiliary control unit 1500. The controller supplies to each device. Furthermore, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power from the outside is cut off There is.

  On the right side of the medal payout device 1180, a medal auxiliary storage 1240 is disposed, and an overflow terminal is disposed behind this (not shown). The power supply device 1252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 1265, and the power cord 1265 connected thereto extends outside through the power cord hole 1262 opened in the back plate 1242 of the main body 1101. There is.

  The front door 1102 is hinged to the side plate 1260 on the left side of the main body 1101 via a hinge device 1276, and on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 1157, a rendering device 1160 and a rendering control board (shown in FIG. Omitted), the upper speaker 1272 is provided. Under the liquid crystal display device 1157, a medal selector 1170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 1266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 1170 causes an illegal medal or the like to fall to the medal receiver 1161, etc. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 1277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 1180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the slot machine 1100 can be roughly divided into a main effect according to a main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 1300. And a second sub-control unit 1500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 1400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 1300 of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The main control unit 1300 includes a basic circuit 1302 that controls the entire main control unit 1300. The basic circuit 1302 includes a CPU 1304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery of winning combination, and stop of reels. ROM 1306 for storing position etc., RAM 1308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 1310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 1312 for measuring time, number of times etc., A WDT (watchdog timer) 1314 is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 1306 and the RAM 1308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 1400 and a second sub control unit 1500 described later. The CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 1315 b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 1304 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 1306 to the counter timer 1312, and the counter timer 1312 generates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 1304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 1304 performs monitoring of each sensor or the like and transmission of a driving pulse in response to the interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 1315b is set to 8 MHz, the dividing value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the dividing data of the ROM 1306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 × 47 ÷ 8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 1300 is activated when the power is turned on, and the random number value generation circuit 1316 used as a hardware random number counter that varies numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 1315a. A start signal output circuit 1338 for outputting a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 1304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 1338 (main control unit main processing described later) To start).

  Further, the main control unit 1300 includes a sensor circuit 1320, and the CPU 1304 is inserted from the various sensors 1318 (bet button 1130 sensor, bet button 1131 sensor, bet button 1132 sensor, and medal insertion slot 1141 every interrupt time). Medal reception sensor of medal, start lever 1135 sensor, stop button 1137 sensor, stop button 1138 sensor, stop button 1139 sensor, settlement button 1134 sensor, medal payout sensor of medal paid out from medal payout device 1180, index sensor of reel 1110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 1111, the index sensor of the reel 1112 and the like is monitored.

  When the sensor circuit 1320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random value generation circuit 1316. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 1316 latches the value at that timing, and stores the value in a register that stores the random value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are provided in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 1141 and detect the passage of medals. Two start levers 1135 sensors are provided in the start lever 1135 to detect a start operation by the player. A stop button 1137 sensor, a stop button 1138 sensor, and a stop button 1139 sensor are provided on the respective stop buttons 1137 to 1139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  A bet button 1130 sensor, a bet button 1131 sensor, and a bet button 1132 sensor are installed on each of the medal insertion buttons 1130 to 1132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 1308 are inserted as insertion medals for the game. Detect the closing operation of the case. The settlement button 1134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 1134. When the settlement button 1134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 1180. Each of the above sensors may be a noncontact sensor or a contact sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 1110, the index sensor of the reel 1111, and the index sensor of the reel 1112 are disposed at predetermined positions of the mounts of the respective reels 1110 to 1112, and L each time a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes Become a level. When the CPU 1304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

  The main control unit 1300 is provided in a drive circuit 1322 for driving a stepping motor provided on the reels 1110 to 1112, a drive circuit 1324 for driving a solenoid provided on a medal selector 1170 for selecting inserted medals, and a medal payout device 1180 Drive circuit 1326 for driving the motor, and various lamps 1336 (prize line display lamp 1120, notification lamp 1123, game medal input enable lamp 1124, replay game lamp 1122, game medal input lamp 1129, game start lamp 1121, stored number indicator A drive circuit 1328 is provided to drive the game information display 1126, the number-of-payouts display 127, and the navigation generation status notification lamp 1190).

  In addition, an information output circuit 1334 is connected to the basic circuit 1302, and the main control unit 1300 is connected to the information input circuit 1652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 1334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 1100 is output. Further, the main control unit 1300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 1330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 1330 has a predetermined voltage value of the power supply. In the example, a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped if the voltage is less than 9 v) is output to the basic circuit 1302.

  Further, the main control unit 1300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 1400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 1400. The information communication between the main control unit 1300 and the first sub control unit 1400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 1300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 1400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command can not be transmitted from the unit 1400 to the main control unit 1300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first secondary control unit 1400 of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The first sub control unit 1400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 1300 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 1402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 1400 based on the control command. There is. The basic circuit 1402 includes a CPU 1404, a RAM 1408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 1410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 1412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 1404 of the basic circuit 1402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 1414 as a system clock. In addition, the first sub control unit 1400 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub control unit 1400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like. It is provided.

  The CPU 1404 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 1406 to the counter timer 1412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 1412 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 1404 every interrupt time. The CPU 1404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  Further, a sound source IC 1418 is provided in the first auxiliary control unit 1400, and speakers 1272 and 1277 are connected to the sound source IC 1418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 1418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 1272 and 1277 according to an instruction from the CPU 1404. The sound source IC 1418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored. The audio data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 1272 and 1277.

  The first auxiliary control unit 1400 further includes a drive circuit 1422, and the drive circuit 1422 includes various lamps 1420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 1144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) via an input / output interface. Is connected.

  Further, the first auxiliary control unit 1400 is provided with a drive circuit 1424 for driving the shutter 1163, and the drive circuit 1424 is connected with the shutter 1163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 1424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 1163 in response to an instruction from the CPU 1404.

  Further, a sensor circuit 1426 is provided in the first sub control unit 1400, and a shutter sensor 1428 is connected to the sensor circuit 1426 via an input interface. The CPU 1404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 1428 every interrupt time.

  The CPU 1404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second secondary control unit 1500 via the output interface. The second secondary control unit 1500 of the slot machine 1100 controls the liquid crystal display device 1157 and the like.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 1500 of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The second sub control unit 1500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 1400 via the input interface, and controls the basic circuit 1502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 1500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 1502 includes a CPU 1504, a RAM 1508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 1510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 1512 is mounted. The CPU 1504 of the basic circuit 1502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 1514 as a system clock. In addition, the second sub control unit 1500 is provided with a ROM 1506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 1500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  The CPU 1504 transmits the data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 1506 to the counter timer 1512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 1512 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 1504 every interrupt time. The CPU 1504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  The second sub control unit 1500 is provided with a VDP 1516 (video display processor), and a ROM 1506 and a VRAM 1518 are connected to the VDP 1516 via a bus. The VDP 1516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 1506 based on a signal from the CPU 1504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 1516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 1157.

<Design array>
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 1110 to 1112 will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which expand | deployed and showed planarly the arrangement | sequence of the symbol given to each reel (the left reel 1110, the inside reel 1111, the right reel 1112).

  In each of the reels 1110 to 1112, symbols of a plurality of types (10 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged for a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in this embodiment) . The numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions (symbol positions) of the symbols on the respective reels 1110 to 1112. For example, "bell symbol" is placed on the frame of No. 1 of the left reel 1110, "Replay symbol" is placed on the No. 0 of the middle reel 1111, and "watermelon pattern" is placed on the No. 0 frame of the right reel 1112. ing.

<Type of winning combination>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a figure which shows the kind of winning combination (including a working combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

  The winning combinations of the slot machine 1100 include special roles (special role 1 and special role 2) and general roles (replay role 1 to replay role 3 and small roles 1 to 4). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations and may be arbitrarily selected.

  Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations to shift to a special gaming state (also denoted as RT3; detailed later will be described) in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Also, the re-playing role 1 to the re-playing role 3 are roles that enable re-playing without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be called "activators". In addition, the “winning” in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operator without medal payout (without medal payout) is displayed on the effective line, for example, special role 1, The special role 2 and the winnings to the re-playing role 1 to the re-playing role 3 are included.

  The special roles 1 and 2 (hereinafter sometimes referred to collectively as "special role") are roles (operating roles) for transitioning to the special gaming state (RT3) by winning. However, medals will not be paid out due to the winning of the role itself. The corresponding symbol combination is that the special character 1 is "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1 (BB1)" or "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2 (BB2)" and the special character 2 is "BAR-BAR-BAR (RB).

  When the special winning combination is internally won, the special winning combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300). When this flag is set to ON, the main control unit 1300 shifts the gaming state to a special combination internal winning state (also described as RT2; details will be described later). The flag remains on until the internal winning combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internal winning combination in the subsequent games. That is, even if the special combination that has been internally won in the special combination 1 or 2 does not win the special combination, the special combination will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, special combination In the case of internal winning in 1, the symbol combination of "seven 1-seven 1-seven 1 (BB1)" or "seven 2-seven 2-seven 2 (BB2)" is in a state in which it is easy to win.

  The main control unit 1300 causes the gaming state to shift to the special gaming state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the internally winning special combination. Furthermore, in this special gaming state, when a predetermined number of payouts are made, the state is shifted to the normal state (also referred to as RT1-1. Details will be described later).

  Replay roles 1 to 3 (hereinafter sometimes referred to collectively as "replay roles") can be a winning combination (action) that can play a game without inserting medals (game media) in the next game by winning. Role, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "Replay-Replay-Replay", "Replay-Replay-Replay", and "Replay-Replay-Bell" with "Replay-Replay 1", "Replay-Replay 1". , Replay role 3 (also referred to as "promotion Replay 2") is "Bell-Replay-Replay".

  The main control unit 1300 displays the gaming state in the navigation generation state 1 (also referred to as RT1-2, which will be described in detail later) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role 2 being displayed in the normal state (RT1-1). Migrate to In addition, based on the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role 3 being displayed in the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2), the gaming state is shifted to the navigation occurrence state 2 (also described as RT1-3, which will be described in detail later). Let

  “Small part 1 to 4” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “small part”) is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is small part 1 (“watermelon” Say "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon", small part 2 (also referred to as "cherry") is "ANY-cherry-ANY", small part 3 (also referred to as "ordering bell") is "bell-bell-bell" , Small part 4 (also referred to as "common bell") is "bell-bell-bell". Also, the corresponding number of payouts is as shown in the figure. In the case of "ANY-Cherry-ANY", the symbol of the middle reel 1111 may be "cherry", and the symbols of the left reel 1110 and the right reel 1112 may be any symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) and the small winning combination 2 (cherry) are internally won by the combination in the winning combination internal lottery process, and the prize is won when the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Also, the small winning combination 3 (Soshinobu Bell) wins when the winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process and the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation order. On the other hand, when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) internally wins the winning combination in the winning combination internal lottery process, the small winning combination 4 always wins regardless of the content of the stop operation (operation order, operation timing). It is also called the role of pull-in 1 and the role of pushing order not questionable.

  In the present embodiment, the small part 3 (sush order bell) and the small part 4 (common bell) have the same symbol combination and the number of medals provided is also the same. When the symbol combination of "BELL" is displayed, the player can not judge whether he has won the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell). In the following, when the internal winning combination is made to either small part 3 (Soshibe Bell) or small part 4 (common bell) and the symbol combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the effective line, “Bell prize” In some cases.

  In addition, when the effective line is one pay line, both of the symbol combination corresponding to small part 3 and the symbol combination corresponding to small part 4 will be stopped on the same effective line, but it is effective. When the line is a plurality of pay lines (for example, 5 pay lines), both of the above are stopped on at least one pay line of the plurality of pay lines. It is because it can be specified from the difference in the stop position whether the player has won the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) if the two have always stopped on different pay lines.

  The small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) is set such that the profit is different according to the operation sequence from the first stop operation to the third stop operation for the player's stop buttons 1137 to 1139. Specifically, when the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won, the correct operation lottery is executed, and (1) the first stop reel is the left reel 1110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 1111, and the third stop reel Is the right reel 1112 (hereinafter referred to as “left middle right”), (2) the first stop reel is the left reel 1110, the second stop reel is the right reel 1112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 1111 Stop operation (hereinafter abbreviated as “left middle right”), (3) stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 1111, the second stop reel is the left reel 1110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 1112 (Hereinafter abbreviated as “middle left and right”) (4) A stop operation where the first stop reel is the middle reel 1111, the second stop reel is the right reel 1112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 1110 (hereinafter “middle Right and left " (5) Stop operation for setting the first stop reel to the right reel 1112, the second stop reel to the left reel 1110, and the third stop reel to the middle reel 1111 (hereinafter abbreviated as "right-left middle"), 6) From among 6 options of stop operation (hereinafter abbreviated as "right middle left") in which the first stop reel is the right reel 1112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 1111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 1110 Since one of them is determined as the stop operation of the correct answer, when the stop operation of the correct answer is performed, the small winning combination 3 (Soshinobu bell) is won, and eight medals are paid out, but the correct answer When a stop operation other than the above is performed, eight medals are not paid out without winning in the small part 3 (Soshinobu Bell).

  On the other hand, the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is not set so that the profit is different according to the operation sequence from the first stop operation to the third stop operation for the player's stop buttons 1137 to 1139. If the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, the small winning combination 4 (common bell) always wins, and eight medals are paid out, regardless of the operation sequence of the above six options. .

  Here, the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

  The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state to be described later is a random number data acquired at the time of the internal lottery, from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 1306, numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination. It is obtained by dividing the value by numerical data (for example, 65535) of a range of numerical values. The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each combination or loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to lottery data corresponding to any one of the winning combinations, and an internal winning combination is determined. In practice, the lottery data is provided with settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probability of at least one combination is made different, and a clerk or the like at a game store can arbitrarily select and set any setting value. .

  In this embodiment, Replay 2 (Promotion Replay 1) and Replay 3 (Promotion Replay 2) have a common winning probability for all settings (setting 1 to setting 6) (for example, Replay 2). In the case of about 1/100, in the case of re-playing role 3, about 1/30). The small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) has an internal winning probability (for example, about 1/8) common to all settings (settings 1 to 6), while the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internal according to the setting. The winning probability is changed (for example, about 1/40 in setting 1, about 1/38 in setting 2, about 1/36 in setting 3, about 1/34 in setting 4, and setting 5 About 1/32, setting 6 is about 1/30, and the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning.

  In addition, although the internal winning probability of the small part 4 (common bell) of this embodiment was made to differ for every setting, it should just differ in at least 2 steps. For example, settings 1 to 3 may be about 1/40, and settings 4 to 6 may be about 1/35. Further, the internal winning probability of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) of the present embodiment is such that the winning probability is higher as the setting is higher, but conversely, the winning probability is lower as the setting is higher. You may

  Further, the internal winning probability of the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) of this embodiment is the internal winning probability common to all settings (setting 1 to setting 6), but is not limited to this. The maximum difference between the internal winning probability of the small winning combination 3 (Sushing Bell) between the settings (the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the internal winning probability; hereinafter also referred to as setting difference) is the setting difference of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) If smaller than the above, the internal winning probability of the small winning combination 3 (Shunshi Bell) may be different for each setting.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming states of the slot machine 1100 will be described. FIG. 56 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 of the slot machine 1100.

  Main control unit 1300 of slot machine 1100 can be roughly divided into a normal state (RT1-1), a navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2), a navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3), and a special combination internal winning state (RT2). , And has a special gaming state (RT3). The normal state (RT1-1), the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), and the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) are collectively referred to as "the normal gaming state". In addition, as described above, the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) and the navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3) may be collectively referred to as "the navigation occurrence state". The navigation generation state is a state related to so-called AT (assist time), and refers to a state where it is possible to execute notification effects (hereinafter referred to as "operation navigation") regarding the operation content of the stop operation. That is, the navigation generation state refers to a gaming state in which the operation navigation including the operation timing or the operation sequence of the stop operation is performed so as to provide the player with an advantageous result.

  Hereinafter, the gaming state of the slot machine 1100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Normal state (RT1-1)>
In the normal state (RT1-1), the setting of the result of the internal lottery is almost lost (no internal winning in any of the special combination, the re-playing combination and the small combination), or the stop display result is any combination. It is set that the stop display result of the loss not falling under the symbol combination of is generally derived, and the total number of medals to be acquired is in a gaming state in which the total number of medals is less than the total number of inserted medals. Thus, the normal state (RT1-1) is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

  The normal state (RT1-1) is set in the initial state, and in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) or the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), when the specified number of operation navigation is performed (details) Is the special game state (RT3) or the normal state (RT1-1) is set when there is a payout of medals exceeding the prescribed number in the special game state (RT3) (details will be described later).

  On the other hand, in the normal state (RT1-1), when the symbol combination corresponding to replay player combination 2 (promotional replay 1) is displayed on the activated line (when it is won in replay player combination 2), the navigation generation state Move to 1 (RT1-2). If the special winning combination is internally won, it shifts to the special winning combination internal winning state (RT2), and the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination is displayed on the activated line (if the special winning combination is won). , Transition to the special game state (RT3).

<Navi occurrence state 1 (RT1-2)>
The navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is a gaming state in which the operation navigation is executed in a game in which the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed when the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in the navigation generation state (RT1-2 and RT1-3 described later). Not only when the internal winning combination is won in the small part 3 (Sushing bell) but also when the internal winning combination is selected in the small part 4 (common bell) in the navigation occurrence state, the internal winning combination is the small part This is to prevent the player from grasping whether it is 3 (sedition bell) or small part 4 (common bell). The main control unit 1300 determines the notification content of the operation navigation.

  The navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) is a case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role 2 (promotional replay 1) is displayed on the activated line in the normal state (RT1-1) (the replay role 2 wins a prize) Is set to

  Here, in the case of setting the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2), the specified number lottery is performed using the specified number lottery table shown in FIG. 57 (a), and one of 1, 2 or 3 is defined. Set to the number of times. Here, in the case of the present embodiment, the prescribed number means the maximum number of operation navigations to be executed by being internally won by the small winning combination 3 (Shunshi Bell), and when the prescribed number of operation navigations are executed, the navigation is performed The occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) ends, and the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). For example, when 3 is set as the specified number of times, the navigation occurrence state 1 (when the operation navigation for the small winning combination 3 (sequence bell) internal winning is executed three times in the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) RT1-2) ends.

  When the symbol combination corresponding to replay player combination 3 is displayed on the activated line in the navigation occurrence status 1 (RT1-2) (when the player wins a prize for replay player combination 3), the navigation occurrence status 2 (RT1-3) When the operation navigation of the specified number of times is executed in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the state transitions to the normal state (RT1-1). If the special winning combination is internally won, it shifts to the special winning combination internal winning state (RT2), and the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination is displayed on the activated line (if the special winning combination is won). , Transition to the special game state (RT3).

  As described above, in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) of the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed in both of the games in which the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won. The termination condition of the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) is the number of times of internal winning of the small winning combination 3 (order order bell). This is because if the number of internal winnings of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) as well as the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) is incorporated into the termination condition of the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2), the navigation occurring condition 1 ( In RT 1-2), it is possible to end the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT 1-2) without winning even once in the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) where winning is easy, and thus the player It is because a case of discouragement may occur. That is, it is to secure the fairness of the navigation occurrence state 1 which is an advantageous period.

<Navi occurrence state 2 (RT1-3)>
In the navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3), as in the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2), in the game in which the internal winning combination has been made to the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) It is a gaming state to be executed.

  In the navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3), when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role 3 (promotion replay 2) is displayed on the activated line in the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) (on the replay role 2) (When winning) is set. In other words, when the player wins the Replay 3 (Promotion Replay 2) until all the specified number (for example, 1 to 3) of operation navigations are performed in the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2), the navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3) is set.

  Here, in the case of setting the navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3), the specified number lottery is performed using the specified number lottery table shown in FIG. 57 (b), and any one of 30, 40 or 50 is defined. Set to the number of times. For example, in the case where the prescribed number of times is 30, when the operation navigation with respect to the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) internal winning is executed 30 times in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) ) Ends. Since the prescribed number of times set in navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3) is larger than the prescribed number of times set in navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2), the period of the navigation occurrence state (hereinafter referred to as "navi period") From the viewpoint of), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is more advantageous than the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2).

  In the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), when the operation navigation of the specified number of times is executed, the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). If the special winning combination is internally won, it shifts to the special winning combination internal winning state (RT2), and the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination is displayed on the activated line (if the special winning combination is won). , Transition to the special game state (RT3).

<Special part internal winning state (RT2)>
The special combination internal winning state (RT2) is a state in which the internal selection flag corresponding to special combination 1 or special combination 2 is set to ON, and this flag is set by the player performing a stop operation at a predetermined timing. It is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding special combination can be displayed.

  The special combination internal winning state (RT2) is set when the special combination is internally won in the normal gaming state (normal state, navigation generation state 1, navigation generation state 2). On the other hand, in the special combination internal winning state (RT2), when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination for which the internal selection has been made is displayed, the special gaming state (RT3) is entered.

<Special game state (RT3)>
The special gaming state (RT3) is a gaming state that benefits the player. That is, in the special gaming state (RT3), the total number of medals to be acquired becomes the gaming state in which the total number of inserted medals exceeds.

  The special gaming state (RT3) is set when the special winning combination of the internal winning is won in the normal gaming state (normal state, navigation occurrence state 1, navigation occurrence state 2), or special combination internal winning state (RT2) . On the other hand, in the special gaming state (RT3), when the prescribed number of sheets is paid out, the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). Specifically, when transitioning to the special gaming state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1, the normal state (RT1-1) is obtained when the payout of the medals exceeding 300 is finished. Move to). In addition, when transitioning to the special game state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special part 2, the transition to the normal state (RT1-1) is made when the payout of the medal exceeding 100 is finished. Do.

  In the present embodiment, the special gaming state (RT3) ends when the specified number of payouts is executed. For example, the special game state (RT3) ends, for example, when it is won by a predetermined combination (for example, single bonus). The game may be ended when the player has won a number of times (for example, eight times) or when a predetermined number of times (for example, six times) of games have been played.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when winning a replay player combination 2 (promotional replay 2) in the normal state (RT1-1), it has shifted to the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2), but the normal state (RT1-1) When the player is internally elected to be the re-playing role 2 (promotion replay 2) in, the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) may be made to transition. In the same manner, when winning a replay player combination 3 (promotional replay 3) in the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2), it has shifted to the navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3), but the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) When the player is internally elected to the replay role 3 (promotional replay 3), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) may be shifted to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the special gaming state (RT3) ends, the normal state (RT1-1) is uniformly transferred, but the present invention is not limited to this, a special role is taken from the navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3) In the case of transition to the internal winning state (RT2) and the special gaming state (RT3), when the special gaming state (RT3) is ended, the state may be shifted to the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3).

  Also, in the normal gaming state of the present embodiment, although there is no particular mention of changing the internal winning probability of the replay role, the internal winning probability of the navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3) to other normal gaming state (RT1 -1, RT 1-2) may be set higher.

<Navi occurrence state>
Next, the navigation generation state will be specifically described using FIG. FIG. 58 is a time chart showing an operation outline of the slot machine 1100 in the navi period of the navi occurrence state 1 in which the prescribed number is one.

  Here, the operation navi counter is a counter for counting the number of times of operation navi executed when the small winning combination 3 (order bell) is internally won. For the counter value of the operation navi counter, the specified number of times determined by lottery is set as the initial value as the initial value, and the internal winning combination is made for the small winning combination 3 (push order bell), and the counter value is 1 each time operation navi is executed. It is subtracted. Then, when the counter value of the operation navigation counter is 0, the navigation occurrence state 1 (navigation period) ends. Although not shown in FIG. 58, as a premise, since the player in the game immediately prior to the navigation period has won the replay role 2 (promotional replay 1), the navigation period of the navigation occurrence state 1 is started.

  In FIG. 58, the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in the third game and the fifth game of the navigation period, the operation navigation is executed, and the small winning combination 3 (soshibei bell) is internally winning in the seventh game. , Indicates the case where the operation navigation is performed. That is, it shows the case where the navigation period of the navigation occurrence state 1 is 7 games. In addition, each of the time t1-t7 of FIG. 58 has shown the time of the start lever operation in each game.

  In the present embodiment, in a game in which the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, (1) operation navigation by the main control unit 1300 and (2) the first sub control unit 1400 and Operation navigation by the second sub control unit 1500 is executed. The main control unit 1300 determines the notification content (operation order) of the operation navigation as described above, so the main control unit 1300 internally elected to the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) In the game, an operation navigation command including navigation information indicating notification content of the operation navigation is transmitted to the first sub control unit 1400. As a result, in the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 1500, it is possible to notify the same notification content as the operation navigation by the main control unit 1300. In the game where the main control unit 1300 internally wins the small winning combination 3 (Sush order bell) in the navigation generation state, the main control unit 1300 selects the operation order of the correct answer as the notification content of the operation navigation, In the game in which the (common bell) is internally won, one of the six options is selected as the notification content of the operation navigation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed not only when the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) is internally won in the navigation generation state but also when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally winning . This is due to the following reasons.

  Conventionally, even if there is a setting difference in the internal winning probability of the small winning combination 4 (common bell; the combination of the same symbol combination as the small winning combination 3 matches the winning combination), in a period other than the navigation period, If it is difficult to distinguish between the small winning combination 4 (common bell) and the small winning combination 3 (Soshinobu bell) that was accidentally hit as a result of operation, the set value from the number of winning combinations of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) It was difficult to guess. However, in the navigation period, when the operation navigation is executed in the game internally won for the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) and the operation navigation is not executed in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, When the small winning combination 4 is won without the operation navigation being executed, it is assumed by the player that the internal winning combination is the small winning combination 4. That is, there is a problem that in the navigation period, the set value can be easily predicted from the number of winnings of the small winning combination 4 as compared to other periods. In the present embodiment, in order to solve such a problem, operation navigation is executed when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in addition to the small winning combination 3 (sushi order bell) in the navigation period, It is difficult to predict the set value from the number of winnings of combination 4 (common bell).

  Here, the operation navigation by the main control unit 1300 is specifically a 7-segment lighting effect using the number-of-payouts display 1127, and the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 1400 and the second sub control unit 1500 Is specifically an image display effect using the liquid crystal display device 1157.

  FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the operation navigation by the main control unit 1300. For example, if the next stop operation is a stop operation for the left reel 1110, 7-segment data displaying the letter "L" is selected to turn on the number-of-payouts display 1127, and the next stop operation is a middle reel 1111. If it is a stop operation for the, the 7-segment data displaying the letter “C” is selected to turn on the number-of-payouts indicator 1127, and if the next stop operation is a stop operation for the right reel 1112, “ The 7-segment data displaying the letter “R” is selected, and the number-of-payouts display device 1127 is turned on.

  FIG. 59 (b) is a view for explaining the display mode of the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 1400 and the second sub control unit 1500. For example, when “left middle right” of six options is selected as the notification content of the operation navigation, a character image in which the number “123” is drawn from left to right is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1157 . Hereinafter, the character image of the operation navigation is referred to as an operation navigation image d10.

  FIG. 59C shows the transition of the notification mode of the operation navigation when “right middle left” is selected as the notification content of the operation navigation. At time t1A of the start lever operation, the slot machine 1100 displays the letter “R” on the number-of-payouts display 1127 and displays the operation navi image d10 composed of the letters “321” on the liquid crystal display device 1157. Thereby, the player can grasp that the right reel 1112 is the first stop reel. Next, at time t1B when the first stop operation is performed, the slot machine 1100 causes the payout number display 1127 to display the letter “C” and the liquid crystal display device 1157 to be configured with the letter “32”. The navigation image d10 is displayed. Thus, the player can grasp that the middle reel 1111 is the second stop reel. Next, at time t1C when the second stop operation is performed, the slot machine 1100 causes the payout number display 1127 to display the letter "C" and the liquid crystal display device 1157 to be configured with the letter "3". The navigation image d10 is displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp that the left reel 1110 is the third stop reel. Finally, at the time when the third stop operation is performed, the slot machine 1100 ends the display of the number-of-payouts display 1127 and the display of the operation navigation image d10 of the liquid crystal display device 1157.

  FIG. 60 is a time chart showing an outline of operation of the slot machine 1100 in the navigation period of the navigation generation state 1 where the prescribed number is 1 as in FIG. FIG. 60 (a) shows the case where the navigation period ends in two games, and FIG. 60 (b) shows the case where the navigation period ends in one game.

  In FIG. 60 (a), in the first game of the navigation period, the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won and the operation navigation is executed, and in the second game, the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) is internally won and the manipulation Since the navigation is performed, the navigation period is ended in two games. On the other hand, FIG. 60 (b) shows the case where the navigation period is ended in one game, since the operation winning is performed by internally winning the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) in the first game of the navigation period. When the player performs the stop operation according to the operation navigation, the stop mode of the reels 1110 to 1112 is the same regardless of whether the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won. Therefore, it can not be grasped which of the small winning combination 3 (Soshinobu Bell) or the small winning combination 4 (Common Bell) has been internally won. However, when a stop operation not in accordance with the operation navigation is performed, for example, when an operation mistake is made, when a small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) is internally won, the non winning combination is made while a small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won. Since it is a prize at times, after all reels 1110 to 1112 stop, it is possible to grasp which of the small winning combination 3 or the small winning combination 4 has been internally won from the stop mode of all reels 1110 to 1112.

  FIG. 61 is a time chart showing the lighting timing of the navigation occurrence state notification lamp 1190. The navigation occurrence status notification lamp 1190 of this embodiment starts lighting from time t11 of medal insertion (automatic insertion) to the next game of the game won in the replaying role 2 (promotion replay 1) in the normal state (RT1-1). Do. The liquid crystal display device 1157 also displays the background image d2 indicating the navigation occurrence state 1 from the time t11 of medal insertion, and the speakers 1272 and 1277 also output a voice indicating the navigation occurrence state 1 from the time t11 of medal insertion.

  When the navigation generation state 1 shifts to the navigation generation state 2, the navigation generation state continues, so the navigation generation state notification lamp 1190 continues to light, but the navigation generation state 1 to the navigation generation state 2 When transitioning to the gaming state, since the navi generation state is ended, the lighting of the navi generation state notification lamp 1190 is ended (non-lighting).

  FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the difference between the notification modes in the case where the final operation navigation is performed in the navigation period and in the case where the final operation navigation is not performed. In addition, the last operation navigation means the operation navigation of the specified number of times for internal winning of small part 3 (Soshibe Bell), for example, when the prescribed number is 3, small part 3 (Soshibe Bell) internal winning The third operation navigation against. On the other hand, the operation navigation which is not the last refers to the operation navigation which is not the last operation navigation. The non-last operation navigation includes both an operation navigation for a small winning combination 3 (Sushing bell) internal winning and an operation navigation for a small winning combination 4 (common bell) internal winning.

  FIG. 62 (a) is a diagram showing a notification mode of an operation in the case of executing an operation navigation which is not the last in the navigation period. In the operation navigation which is not the last, as shown in FIG. 62A, the liquid crystal display device 1157 and the number-of-payouts display 1127 are used to notify the order of the stop operation. That is, the liquid crystal display device 1157 displays the operation navi image d10 on the background image d2.

  On the other hand, FIG. 62 (b) is a diagram showing a notification mode of an operation when the final operation navigation is performed in the navigation period. In the last operation navigation, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the same notification mode as the operation navigation not the last with regard to the operation content (in detail, the display mode of the operation navigation image d10 and the lighting mode of the payout number display 1127 Is the same) and uses the liquid crystal display device 1157 and the number-of-payouts display 1127 to notify the order of the stop operation. However, in the final operation navigation, in addition to this, a black line image d20 is displayed on the periphery of the outer frame of the liquid crystal display device 1157, and the shutters 1163a and 1163 vibrate left and right. That is, the final operation navigation has a notification mode different from the operation navigation not the last as the entire effect while making the notification content identical to the operation navigation not the last.

  As a result, the player can perform the stop operation without being confused by the notification content, and can also grasp that the navigation period (navigation generation state) ends. In the present embodiment, the player is not made to grasp the internal winning combination of the game for executing the operation navigation, so the number of times of the remaining operation navigation can not be notified. Therefore, there is a possibility that the navigation period ends without notice and the player may be puzzled. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the last operation navigation is notified in a special notification mode to indicate that it is the last, so that the player is not puzzled.

  FIG. 63 is a time chart when the navigation period ends and when the navigation period continues. FIG. 63 (a) shows the case where the navigation period of the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) in which the prescribed number of times is 1 ends in 2 games. In this case, the time point of the start lever operation of the first game of the normal state (RT1-1) which is the next game of the second game (small winning combination 3 internally elected game) of the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) A period end effect indicating that the navi period has ended is executed during one game from t3. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the navigation period ends, the period end effect over one game is executed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 63 (b) shows that in the second game of the navigation period in the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) where the prescribed number of times is 1, the player wins the replay role 3 (promotion replay 3). It is a time chart in case navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is started from a game. In this case, although the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) ends, (1) the navigation generation state 2 (from the time t1 of the start lever operation of the first game of the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) Until time t3 of the start lever operation of the first game of RT1-3), navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), and after time t3, navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), and the navigation period is continuous Therefore, the period end effect is not performed after the end of the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2). That is, by making the condition for terminating the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) the same as the condition for starting the navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3), the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) is continued. Thus, the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) can be executed.

  In addition, although the navi generation | occurrence | production state of this embodiment was started from the game following the game to which the transition to a navi generation | occurrence | production state was determined, it is not limited to this. The start lottery may be executed in each game after the next game, and the navigation generation state may be started when the game is won. Moreover, although the navi generation | occurrence | production state of this embodiment was complete | finished by the game internally won by the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) of the regulation frequency | count, it is not limited to this. The navigation generation state may be ended after a predetermined number of games (for example, three games, etc.) have passed from the game internally won to the predetermined number of times the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell).

<Operation of slot machine>
The processes of the main control unit 1300, the first sub control unit 1400, and the second sub control unit 1500 will be described below using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 1338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 having received the start signal performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 64 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 1306.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S301. In this initialization, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 1304, setting of interrupt prohibition, initialization of the I / O 1310, initialization of various variables stored in the RAM 1308, operation permission to the WDT 1314 and initialization Set the value etc.

  In step S302, bet number setting / start operation acceptance processing is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not the medal has been inserted, and preparation for the transmission of the insertion command indicating that the medal has been inserted is performed. In the case where the player plays a winning combination in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is inserted, so that the player does not need to insert the medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 1135 is operated, and if the start lever 1135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S303.

  In step S303, the number of inserted medals is determined, and a pay line determination process of determining a valid pay line is performed.

  In step S304, random number acquisition processing for acquiring the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 1316 is performed.

  In step S305, a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the internal winning combination lottery process, the internal winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 1306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S304, and Preparation for transmitting an internal lottery command indicating the result to the first sub control unit 1400 is performed. As a result of the internal lottery, when the internal winning combination is made to any winning combination (including the operating combination), the flag of the winning combination is turned on.

  In step S306, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 1306 of the main control unit 1300.

  In step S307, the main control unit / operation navigation setting process (described in detail later) for setting the operation navigation of the main control unit 300 is executed.

  In step S308, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all the reels 1110 to 1112.

  In step S309, a reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 can be received, and when one of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of the reel stop data is stopped to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. By referring to it, one of the reels 1110 to 1112 is stopped according to the number of drawn-in frames set in the stop table. When all the reels 1110 to 1112 stop, the process proceeds to step S310. In this step S309, stop button reception commands related to the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 subjected to the stop operation for each stop operation (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation Prepares to transmit the stop button acceptance 2 command and the stop button acceptance 3 command) for the third stop operation to the first sub control unit 1400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command related to the stop position of the reel (specifically, for the first stop reel, the reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, the reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, the reel stop) The third sub-control unit 1400 prepares to transmit the third command.

  In step S310, a prize determination process is performed to determine a prize. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 1114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on the activated pay line, it is determined that the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is won. Further, in this step S310, preparation for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub control unit 1400 is performed.

  In step S311, a medal giving process is performed. In the medal awarding process, if the player has won a winning combination with a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of pay lines.

  In step S312, a game state control process (described in detail later) is performed. In the gaming state control process, processing relating to the transition of each gaming state is performed, and the gaming state is transitioned by the establishment of the start condition or the termination condition. In addition, preparation for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current game state is performed.

  One game ends by the above. Thereafter, the game proceeds by returning to step S302 and repeating the above-described processing.

  The various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S1106 in FIG. 65) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 1300 includes a counter timer 1312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S1101, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 1304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S1102, the WDT 1314 is periodically (this process is not performed) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error is not detected) because the count value of the WDT 1314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S1103, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of the sensor circuit 1320 of various sensors 1318 are input through the input port of the I / O 1310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is divided for each of the various sensors 318. It stores in the provided signal state storage area.

  In step S1104, various game processes are executed, and a process corresponding to the interrupt status is executed.

  In step S1105, a timer update process is performed. More specifically, the various timers are updated in each time unit.

  In step S1106, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub control unit 1400. In the first sub-control unit 1400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 1300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S1107, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 1308 is output to the information input circuit 1652 separate from the slot machine 1100 via the information output circuit 1334.

  In step S1108, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 1318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S1103 are read out, and the presence or absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality and medal discharge abnormality is monitored, and an error is detected. (Not shown) Execute error processing. Further, according to the current gaming state, the setting of the medal selector 1170 (the medal blocker on which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 1170 operates), the various lamps 1336, and the various seven-segment (SEG) displays is performed.

  In step S1109, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S1111, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step S1110.

  In step S1110, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interruption end processing, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S1101 are set in the respective original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in step S1111, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure upon recovery from power as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

<Main control unit / Operation navigation setting process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the main control unit / operation navigation setting process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the main control unit / operation navigation setting process of step S307 of FIG.

  In step S401, it is determined whether the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the navigation generation state (RT1-2 or RT1-3). If the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the navigation generation state, the process proceeds to step S402. If not, the main control unit / operation navigation setting process is ended.

  In step S402, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination of the small winning combination 3 (order order bell) has been made in the game. If the small winning combination 3 (Sushing order bell) is internally won in the game, the process proceeds to step S403. If not, the process proceeds to step S406.

  In step S403, the correct operation lottery is executed to determine the operation content of the correct solution, and the operation content of the determined correct solution is determined as the content of the operation navigation in the case where the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) is internally won. Specifically, one of the six operation options of “left middle right”, “right and left middle”, “middle left and right”, “middle right left”, “right left middle”, and “right middle left”, and any one operation order, small It determines as an operation sequence of the stop operation of the correct answer for winning a winning combination 3 and sets it as the content of the operation navigation. For example, "right middle left" is taken as the content of the operation navigation.

  In step S404, in accordance with the contents of the operation navigation determined in step S403, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed. As a result, operation navigation by the main control unit 1300 is executed (see FIGS. 59 (a) and (c)).

  In step S405, 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the operation navigation counter, and the process proceeds to step S409.

  On the other hand, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination 4 (common bell) has been internally won in the game. If the small winning combination 4 is internally won in the game, the process proceeds to step S407. If not, the main control unit / operation navigation setting process is ended.

  In step S407, the contents of the operation navigation in the case where the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won are determined. Specifically, determine the operation order of any one from 6 options of “left middle right”, “right and left middle”, “middle left and right”, “middle right left”, “right left middle”, and “right middle left” . For example, for example, “right, middle, left” is taken as the content of the operation navigation.

  In step S408, in accordance with the contents of the operation navigation determined in step S407, the effect setting of the operation navigation is performed. As a result, the operation control by the main control unit 1300 is executed (see FIG. 59A). After the process of step S408 ends, the process proceeds to step S409.

  In step S409, preparation for transmitting an operation navigation command including the operation content of the operation navigation, the value of the operation navigation counter, and the like to the first sub control unit 1400 is performed. As a result, the first sub control unit 1400 and the second sub control unit 1500 execute the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 1400 and the second sub control unit 1500 based on the content of the received operation navigation command (FIG. 59). (B) (c)).

<Playing state control processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the gaming state control process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the gaming state control process of step S312 of FIG.

  In step S501, it is determined whether a special combination (specifically, special combination 1 or 2) is won in the game. If a special combination is won in the game, the process proceeds to step S502. If not, the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S502, the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is set to the special gaming state (RT3). After the process of step S502 ends, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S503, it is determined whether or not the special winning combination (specifically, the special combination 1 or 2) is internally won in the game. If the special combination is internally won in the game, the process proceeds to step S504, and if not, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S504, the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is set to the special combination internal winning state (RT2). After the process of step S504 ends, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S505, it is determined whether the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the normal state (RT1-1). If the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the normal state (RT1-1), the process proceeds to step S506, and if not, the process proceeds to step 508.

  In step S506, it is determined whether or not the player has won a second winning combination (promotion replay 1) in the game. If the player wins the second game in the game, the process proceeds to step S507. If not, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S507, the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is set to navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2). In step S507, the specified number of times drawing is executed to determine the specified number of times of operation navigation in the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) (see FIG. 57 (a)). Further, the value of the specified number of times of the operation navigation determined is set as the initial value of the operation navigation counter. After the process of step S507 ends, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S508, it is determined whether the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2). If the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the process proceeds to step S509, and if not, the process proceeds to step 513.

  In step S509, it is determined whether or not the player has won a remake 3 (promotional replay 2) in the game. If the player wins the third game in the game, the process proceeds to step S510. If not, the process proceeds to step S511.

  In step S510, the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is set to navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3). Further, in step S510, the specified number of times drawing is executed to determine the number of times of execution of the operation navigation in the navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3) (see FIG. 57 (b)). Further, the value of the specified number of times of the operation navigation determined is set as the initial value of the operation navigation counter. After the process of step S510 is finished, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S511, it is determined whether the specified number of operation navigation has been performed in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2). When the operation navigation of the specified number of times is performed in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), that is, when the value of the operation navigation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S512, and otherwise, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S512, the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is set to the normal state (RT1-1). After the process of step S512 ends, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S513, it is determined whether the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3). If the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), the process proceeds to step S514, and if not, the process proceeds to step 516.

  In step S514, it is determined whether the specified number of operation navigation has been performed in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3). When the operation navigation of the specified number of times is performed in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), that is, when the value of the operation navigation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S515, and otherwise, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S515, the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is set to the normal state (RT1-1). After the process of step S515 ends, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S516, other game state control processing is executed. For example, in the special game state (RT3), when the medals exceeding the prescribed number are paid out, the game state of the main control unit 1300 is set to the normal state (RT1-1). In addition, preparation is made to transmit a game state command indicating the game state of the main control unit 1300.

<Process of first sub control unit>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 1400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 68A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 1404 of the first secondary control unit 1400. FIG. 68B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 1400. FIG. 68 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 1400.

  First, the main processing of the first secondary control unit 1400 will be described using FIG. 68 (a).

  When the power is turned on, first, in step S3601, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 1408, and the like are performed. In this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information indicating a result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information indicating a gaming state, are respectively provided in the RAM 1408.

  In step S3602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3603.

  In step S3603, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S3604, command processing which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 1300 is executed.

  In step S3605, an effect control process is performed. Here, preparation for rendering is performed in accordance with the rendering reservation information in the rendering reservation area provided in the RAM 1408. This preparation includes, for example, processing such as reading out the effect data from the ROM 1406, and performing processing of updating the effect data when it is necessary to update the effect data. For example, in the present embodiment, when the internal winning is made to the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state, the first sub-control unit 1400 and the second sub-control unit 1500 Make settings for operation navigation.

  In step S3606, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3605. For example, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 1418 in the effect data read out in step S 3605, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 1418.

  In step S3607, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3605. For example, when there is an instruction to various lamps 1420 in the effect data read out in step S3605, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 1422.

  In step S3608, information output processing is performed to set to transmit a command to the second sub control unit 1500 based on the processing result in step S3605. For example, when there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 1500 in the effect data read out in step S3605, the setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S3602.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 1400 will be described using FIG. 68 (b). The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 1400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 1300. In step S3701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 1300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 1408.

  Next, a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1404 of the first secondary control unit 1400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 1400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S3801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 1408 described in step S3602 in the first secondary control unit main processing shown in FIG. 68A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S3602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S3802, transmission of a command to the second sub control unit 1500 set in step S3608, update processing of the effect random number value, and the like are performed.

<Process of second sub control unit>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 1500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 69A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 1504 of the second sub control unit 1500. FIG. 69B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 1500. FIG. 69C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 1500. FIG. 69D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 1500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S5001 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S5401, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization processing of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 1508, and the like are performed.

  In step S5402, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5403.

  In step S5403, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S5404, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 1504 of the second secondary control unit 1500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 1404 of the first secondary control unit 1400 or not.

  In step S5405, an effect control process is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S5404, processing corresponding to this command is performed. In addition, processing such as reading out effect data other than this from the ROM 1506 is performed, and updating of effect data is performed when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S5406, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S5405. For example, when there is a shutter control command among the effect data read out in step S5405, the shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

  In step S5407, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result in step S5405. For example, when an instruction for image control is included in the effect data read out in step S5405, image control corresponding to this instruction is performed. For example, when performing operation navigation by the first sub control unit 1400 and the second sub control unit 1500, image control for displaying the operation navigation image d10 is executed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S5402.

  Next, a command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 1500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 1400.

  In step S5601 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 1400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 1508.

  Next, a second secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1504 of the second secondary control unit 1500 will be described using FIG. 69 (c). The second secondary control unit 1500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S5601, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 1508 described in step S5402 in the second secondary control unit main processing shown in FIG. 69A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S5402, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S5602, update processing of the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S5407 in the main processing of the second sub control unit 1500 will be described using FIG. 69 (d). The figure is a figure which shows the flowchart which shows the flow of image control processing.

  In step S5701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, first, the CPU 1504 swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 1536 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 1157. Next, the CPU 1504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 1506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 1518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 1516 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 1516 transfers image data from the ROM 1506 to the VRAM 1518 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 1516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 1504.

  In step S5702, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 1516 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5703, and if not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for

  In step S5703, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 1518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 1518 in step S5701, the CPU 1504 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 1518, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc. are indicated to the VDP 1516. The VDP 1516 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S5704, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 1504 instructs the VDP 1516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 1516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 1504.

  In step S5705, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 1516 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5706, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input.

  In step S5706, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 1508 and counts how many images of a scene are generated, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the normal gaming state, that is, the normal state (RT1-1), even if a difference is made to the internal winning probability of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) according to the settings (settings 1 to 6). And in the navigation occurrence state (RT1-2, RT1-3), it is difficult to grasp the winning of the small combination 4 (common bell), so it is difficult to infer the set value in a short-time game. Specifically, in the normal state (RT1-1), the small combination 3 (pushing order bell) of the same symbol combination as the small winning combination 4 (common bell) may also win, so the small combination 3 (pushing order bell) or small It is difficult to determine which bell of combination 4 (common bell) is won. Also, in the navigation occurrence state (RT1-2, RT1-3), the operation navigation is executed for the internal winnings of the small winning combination 3 (Soshibe Bell) and the small winning combination 4 (common bell), so If the stop operation is performed, it will be a prize in any case, and it is difficult to determine which bell of the small winning combination 3 (sushi order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won.

<Other Modifications>
Subdivision of small winning combination and re-playing combination In the above embodiment (the fourth embodiment), when the small winning combination 3 (Soshinobu Bell) is internally won, the correct operation lottery is executed to determine the correct operation sequence. (Refer to step S403 in FIG. 75) As shown in FIG. 70, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is subdivided and operations of different answers are made to correspond to each of the subdivided small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) An order may be assigned (Modification 1). That is, one reel stop data may be allocated to one internal winning combination. According to the first modification, the correct operation order can be determined without newly executing the correct operation lottery.

  For example, when the internal winning combination is made to the small winning combination 3-1 (bell 1) shown in FIG. 70, “left middle right” is the correct operation order, and the internal winning combination is made to the small winning combination 3-3 (bell 3). The "middle right left" is the correct operation order. The internal winning probability of each of the small winning combination 3-1 (bell 1) to the small winning combination 3-6 (bell 6) is the same.

  Further, in the above embodiment (the fourth embodiment), when transitioning from the normal state (RT1-1) to the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), and from the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) to the navigation generation state 2 In the case of shifting to (RT1-3), the specified number of times is performed to determine the specified number (see FIG. 57), but as shown in FIG. 71, the specified number is determined according to the subdivided replay role. You may make it do (Modification 2). According to the second modification, the specified number of times can be determined without newly executing the specified number of times drawing. 71 (a) is a schematic diagram of a specified number of times lottery table used when the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is shifted, and FIG. 71 (b) is a navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3). It is a schematic diagram of a regulation frequency lottery table used when it shifts.

  For example, when a player wins a prize in the normal state (RT1-1), the prescribed number of times in the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) is once, and in the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) When winning in the game combination 3-2, the prescribed number of times in the navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3) is 40 times. Note that the internal winning probability of each of the re-playing players 2-1 to the re-playing combination 2-3 and the internal winning probability of each of the re-playing combination 3-1 to the re-playing combination 3-3 may be the same. The higher the set value, the higher the internal winning probability of the re-playing combination having a larger number of times of assignment may be set.

Variation of Operation Navi In the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in the navigation generation state, the operation navigation is always performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in the navigation generation state, there may be cases where the operation navigation is not performed (Modification 3). FIG. 72 is a time chart showing an operation outline of the slot machine 1100 in the navigation period of the third modification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 72, when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in the second game in the navigation period, the operation navigation is executed, while the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is in the third in the navigation period If won, do not execute operation navigation. It will be even more difficult to guess the winning frequency of the small role 4 (common bell). From the viewpoint of making it difficult to guess which of the small part 3 (Soshinobu Bell) or the small part 4 (common bell) is internally elected, the internal part is elected to the small part 4 (common bell) in the navigation period. In this case, it is preferable to execute the operation navigation at least once (for example, the first one). This is to secure the fairness of the advantageous navigation period.

  Further, in the above embodiment (the fourth embodiment), when the operation navigation for the specified number of times is executed, the navigation generation state is ended, that is, the navigation generation is performed for the internal winning of the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) The state is ended, but the navigation generation state is ended when the operation navigation for the maximum prescribed number of times is executed including the internal winning of not only the small winning combination 3 (Soshinobu bell) but also the small winning combination 4 (common bell) You may make it do (Modification 4). Here, the maximum prescribed number of times means the maximum value of the prescribed number of times given in the prescribed number of times drawing, and it is 3 (Navir generating state 1 (RT1-2) in the above embodiment (the fourth embodiment). See FIG. 57 (a)).

  When the operation navigation is performed the number of times exceeding the maximum prescribed number of times in the navigation generation state 1 of the above-described embodiment (the fourth embodiment), the player determines the small winning combination 4 (common It is because it is possible to grasp the number of internal wins of Bell). On the other hand, in the fourth modification, since the operation navigation can be executed only up to the maximum prescribed number of times, that is, three times, it becomes difficult to grasp the number of internal wins of the small winning combination 4 (common bell). In this case, it is determined that the operation navigation with respect to the internal winning of the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) is performed at least once in the navigation generation state 1 from the purport of the navigation generation state. This is to secure the fairness of the advantageous navigation period.

  FIG. 73 is a time chart showing an operation outline of the slot machine 1100 in the navigation period of the modification 4. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 73, since the prescribed number of times is 3, when the operation navigation for the internal winning of the small winning combination 3 (Sushibe Bell) and the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is executed three times finish. That is, in this case, in the second game, the third game and the fourth game of the navigation period, the small winning combination 3 or the small winning combination 4 is internally won, so the navigation generation state 1 ends in four games. The value of the operation navi counter in the fourth modification is subtracted from the execution of operation navi with respect to the internal winning of any of the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell).

  Further, in the fourth modification, when the operation navigation of the maximum prescribed number of times is executed in the navigation occurrence state 1, the navigation occurrence state 1 is ended, but the navigation occurrence state 1 is not ended but the effect is changed and the navigation occurrence state The player may be made to give an illusion of 1 being completed (Modification 5). That is, the termination condition of the navigation occurrence state 1 is the same as the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), when the number of times of execution of the operation navigation has reached the prescribed number (only the internal winning of the small winning combination 3 (order order bell) Target). Also in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the internal winning number of the small winning combination 4 (common bell).

  FIG. 74 is a time chart showing an operation outline of the slot machine 1100 in the navigation period of the fifth modification. In the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2), as shown in FIG. 74, at the beginning, the effects of the navigation occurrence state 1 are executed, but in the fourth game of the navigation occurrence state 1, operation navigation is executed three times Since the fourth game in the navigation generation state 1 is performed, the effect of the navigation generation state 2 is executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion of transition to the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3). In addition, when the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) ends (specifically, the N game of the navigation generation state shown in FIG. 74), the effect of the navigation generation state 2 is ended, so Preferably, in addition to the numerical value shown in FIG. 57B, a single-digit numerical value (for example, 1, 2, 3, etc.) may be provided as the prescribed number of times in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3). It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the internal winning number of the small role 4 (common bell).

  In addition, the timing of the effect change may be taken as the consumption of the prescribed game number other than when the operation navigation of the maximum prescribed number of times is executed. For example, when the prescribed game number is set to 10 games, rendering 10 games in navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) completes the effects of navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2), and 11 games of navigation occurrence state 1 The effect of navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3) is started from the eyes.

-Battle production In addition, the slot machine 1100 is configured to execute battle production in a game in which a small winning combination 3 (Soshinobu bell) or a small winning combination 4 (common bell) in navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) is internally won. (Modification 6). The battle effect is an effect of notifying whether or not the navigation generation state 1 ends in the game based on the battle result. Specifically, it is an effect that, when the main character confronts the enemy character and wins, the navigation generation state 1 is continued, and when the main character loses, the navigation generation state 1 is ended. The battle effect is started based on the start lever operation, and the battle result is notified based on the third stop operation. In the battle effect, in addition to displaying a battle image d30 on the liquid crystal display device 1157, a battle sound is output using the speakers 1272 and 1277, and light emission of battle effect is performed using various lamps 1420. In batt production, when the main character wins, a battle victory image d30S showing that the main character wins, and when the main character loses, a battle defeat image d30F showing that the main character has lost is liquid crystal displayed Display on the device 1157.

  Further, the slot machine 1100 determines whether or not the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation has been performed in the game for executing the operation navigation, and when the stop operation according to the notification content is performed, the notification content When an operation success image d10S (for example, a word image such as “success”) is displayed and the stop operation not complying with the notification content is performed, the operation failure image d10F indicating that the notification content is not complied with (For example, a word image such as "failure") is displayed. In the sixth modification, the operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is “successful operation”, and the stop operation not following the notification content of the operation navigation is “failure operation” regardless of the winning / non-winning of the internally winning combination. Also called. For example, in the case of a game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won regardless of the stopping operation, but the "success operation" is performed according to the notification content of the operation navigation The operation success image d10S is displayed, and the operation failure image d10F is displayed when “a failure operation” is performed without following the notification contents of the operation navigation.

  In the sixth modification, in the game internally selected to small part 3 (sush order bell) or small part 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1, battle rendition is executed each time, but it is limited to this In addition, it is not necessary to execute in a game in which the internal winning of the small part 3 (sedition order bell) or the small part 4 (common bell) of the navigation generation state 1 is internally won.

  FIG. 75 is a time chart regarding an effect of the game in which the last operation navigation is performed in the navigation generation state 1 of the modification 6. In FIG. 75 (a), when the correct operation according to the notification content is performed and the small winning combination 3 (Shunshi Bell) is won, FIG. 75 (b) shows that the operation of the incorrect solution does not follow the notification content. It shows a case where the player has not won the small part 3 (Soshinobu Bell). In addition, since the operation order of the correct answer in the game shown in FIG. 75 is “right middle left”, the notification content of the operation navigation is “right middle left”.

  When the correct operation is performed according to the notification content, as shown in FIG. 75A, the slot machine 1100 simultaneously performs the operation success image d10S and the battle defeat image d30F at time t1D of the third stop operation. Display on the same screen. As a result, the player can grasp that the navigation occurrence state 1 is ended along with the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) winning. In this case, the operation success image d10S and the battle defeat image d30F, which are exactly opposite in content, are simultaneously started to be executed. When the battle defeat image d30F is displayed after displaying the operation success image d10S first, not simultaneously, and notification is performed in the order of success and failure in time series, it means the order of the notification (operation success The reason is that it may make it difficult to understand the contents of the game.

  On the other hand, in the case where the incorrect operation is performed in accordance with the notification content, the slot machine 1100 fails the operation at time t1C of the second stop operation which is the failure operation as shown in FIG. 75 (b). The image d10F is displayed, and then the battle defeat image d30F is displayed at time t1D of the third stop operation. In this case, since both of the effects are disappointingly notified to the player, even if notification is made in chronological order, no confusion is given to the player. As a result, the player grasps that the navigation occurrence state 1 is ended together with the small winning combination 3 (order bell) non-winning.

  In the sixth modification, when the small winning combination 3 (Shunshi Bell) is internally won and the failure operation is performed, the operation failure image d10F is displayed at the time of the failure operation, but the time of the failure operation In the above, the operation failure image d10F may not be displayed. Further, the notification mode of the operation failure image d10F is the same as the operation failure image d10F displayed when the internal winning combination is made to the small winning combination 4 (common bell) described later and the operation not following the notification of the operation navigation is performed. This is a notification mode (see FIG. 76 (b)). This is to prevent grasping at which of the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) the internal winning is made at the time of the failure operation.

  FIG. 76 is a time chart of a game in which the operation navigation has been performed for the internal winning of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1 according to the sixth modification. FIG. 76 (a) shows the case where the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed and the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won, FIG. 76 (b) shows the stop operation not following the notification content of the operation navigation And the case of winning a small role 4 (common bell) is shown. The notification content of the operation navigation in the game shown in FIG. 76 is “right middle left”.

  When the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100 performs the operation success image d10S and the battle victory at time t1D of the third stop operation as shown in FIG. 76 (a). The image d30S is simultaneously displayed on the same screen. As a result, the player can grasp that the navigation occurrence state 1 continues with the small winning combination 4 (common bell) winning.

  On the other hand, when a stop operation not in accordance with the notification contents of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100 performs an operation at time t1C of the second stop operation which is a failure operation as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The failure image d10F is displayed, and then the battle victory image d30F is displayed at time t1D of the third stop operation. As a result, the player can correctly grasp that the navigation occurrence state 1 continues with the small winning combination 4 (common bell) winning.

  In the sixth modification shown in FIG. 75 (a), when the operation for stopping the correct answer is performed in the game in which the last operation navigation is performed, the operation success image d10S and the battle defeat image d30F are simultaneously displayed on the same screen. If the player is not puzzled, the operation success image d10S and the battle defeat image d30F may be displayed at different timings (Modification 6-1).

  FIG. 77 (a) is a modification of FIG. 77 (b) when the player performs the correct operation and wins the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) in the game in which the final operation navigation of the modification 6-1 is executed. In the game which performed the last operation navigation of Example 6-1, it is a time chart when the incorrect answer is operated and it does not win in the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell). In addition, since the operation order of the correct answer in the game shown in FIG. 77 is “right middle left”, the notification content of the operation navigation is “right middle left”.

  When the correct operation is performed according to the notification content of the operation navigation, the slot machine 1100 displays the operation success image d10S at time t1D of the third stop operation as shown in FIG. The battle defeat image d30F is displayed at time t1E after the image d10S is deleted. Note that the player may feel uncomfortable if the battle defeat image d30F is displayed despite the success operation. Therefore, the display of the battle image is started at time t1A of the start lever operation before the display of the operation result (display of the operation successful image d10S), and at time t1D of the third stop operation where the operation successful image d10S is displayed. Continues the display of the battle image, and displays the battle defeat image d30F at time t1E when the operation success image d10S is not displayed. With such a display, the battle image can only display images of a predetermined story sequentially, and can give the impression that the display content of the battle image and the result of the player's operation are not related to each other. . That is, the player can recognize that the navigation generation state ends based on a result different from the result of the stop operation.

  On the other hand, in the case where an incorrect answer operation is performed without following the informing content of the operation navigation, the slot machine 1100 receives a failure at the time t1C of the second stop operation which is the failure operation, as shown in FIG. 77 (b). The operation failure image d10F for the operation navigation is displayed, and then the battle defeat image d30F is displayed at time t1E after the operation failure image d10F is deleted. The same applies to the case where the failure operation occurs at time t1B of the first stop operation. That is, in this case, the same operation as that of the sixth modification is performed.

  Note that the player may misunderstand that the battle defeat image d30F is displayed because the player has performed a failure operation. Therefore, the display of the battle image is started at time t1A of the start lever operation before the display of the operation result (display of the operation success image d10S), and at time t1C of the second stop operation where the operation failure image d10F is displayed. Continues the display of the battle image, continues the display of the battle image at time t1D of the third stop operation, and displays the battle lost image d30F at time t1E when the operation failure image d10F is not displayed. By such display, the battle image only displays images of a predetermined story sequentially, and gives an impression that the display content of the battle image and the result of the player's operation are not related.

  Similarly, in the sixth modification shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the player performs a stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation and wins the small winning combination 4 (common bell), the battle with the operation success image d10S If victory image d30S is simultaneously displayed on the same screen (see (a) in FIG. 76) but the stop operation is performed according to the notification contents of the operation navigation and the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won, the operation The success image d10S and the battle victory image d30S may be displayed at different timings (Modification 6-2).

  FIG. 78 is a time chart of the game in which the operation navigation is performed on the internal winning of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) of the navigation generation state 1 of the modification 6-2. FIG. 78 (a) shows the case where the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed and the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won, FIG. 78 (b) shows the stop operation not following the notification content of the operation navigation And the case of winning a small role 4 (common bell) is shown. The notification content of the operation navigation in the game shown in FIG. 78 is “right middle left”.

  When the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100 displays the operation success image d10S at the time t1D of the third stop operation as shown in FIG. A battle victory image d30S is displayed at time t1E after the successful image d10S is deleted. The player can recognize that the navigation generation state continues based on a result different from the result of the stop operation.

  Note that the player may misunderstand that the battle victory image d30S has been displayed because the player performed the success operation. Therefore, the display of the battle image is started at time t1A of the start lever operation before the display of the operation result (display of the operation successful image d10S), and at time t1D of the third stop operation where the operation successful image d10S is displayed. Continues the display of the battle image, and displays the battle victory image d30S at time t1E when the operation success image d10S is not displayed. By such display, the battle image only displays images of a predetermined story sequentially, and gives an impression that the display content of the battle image and the result of the player's operation are not related.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 1100, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the stop operation not complying with the notification contents of the operation navigation is performed, the operation navigation at time t1C of the second stop operation which is a failure operation. The operation failure image d10F is displayed, and then the battle winning image d30S is displayed at time t1E after the operation failure image d10F is deleted. The same applies to the case where the failure operation occurs at time t1B of the first stop operation. That is, in this case, the same operation as that of the sixth modification is performed.

  Note that the player may feel uncomfortable if the battle victory image d30S is displayed despite the failure operation. Therefore, the display of the battle image is started at time t1A of the start lever operation before the display of the operation result (display of the operation failure image d10F), and at time t1C of the second stop operation where the operation failure image d10F is displayed. Continues displaying the battle image, continues displaying the battle image at time t1D of the third stop operation, and displays the battle victory image d30S at time t1E when the operation failure image d10F is not displayed. By such display, the battle image only displays images of a predetermined story sequentially, and gives an impression that the display content of the battle image and the result of the player's operation are not related.

Further, in the sixth modification, the execution of the battle effect is started based on the start lever operation, but the execution start opportunity of the battle effect is not limited to this. For example, a battle scene effect may be executed after the operation navigation effect is finished (Modification 6-3).
FIGS. 79 and 80 are time charts showing the flow of the operation navigation and the battle effect of the modification 6-3. More specifically, FIG. 79 (a) shows that, in the game in which the last operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 is executed, the operation of the correct answer according to the notification content is performed and the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) is won, FIG. 79 (b) shows the case where an incorrect answer operation not in accordance with the notification content is performed in the game in which the last operation navigation has been performed and the player does not win a prize in the small winning combination 3 (order order bell). Is a game in which the operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of the small winning combination 4 of the navigation occurrence state 1 (common bell), the stopping operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation is performed and the small winning combination 4 (common bell) In the case of winning, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the game in which the operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the navigation occurrence state 1, the stop operation not following the notification content of the operation navigation is performed It shows the case where a small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won. The notification content of the operation navigation in the game shown in FIGS. 79 and 80 is “right, middle, left”.

  When the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100 succeeds in the operation at time t1D of the third stop operation as shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 80 (a). The image d10S is displayed, and at time t1E thereafter, the battle effect image d30 is started to be displayed, and the battle failure image d30F or the battle victory image d30S operation failure image d10F is displayed as the end of the display.

  Note that the player may feel uncomfortable because there is a display of the battle victory image d30S or a display of the battle defeat image d30F after performing the success operation. Therefore, the battle image is not displayed at time t1D of the third stop operation, and the battle image d30 is started to be displayed at time t1E when the operation success image d10S is not displayed. That is, by not starting to display the battle image d30 immediately after the stop operation is performed, the display content of the battle image and the result of the player's operation are not related.

  On the other hand, when a stop operation not in accordance with the notification contents of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100 performs a second stop operation not in accordance with the notification contents as shown in FIGS. 79 (b) and 80 (b). The operation failure image d10F is displayed at time t1C, and the battle effect image d30 is started to be displayed at time t1E after time t1D of the third stop operation, and the battle failure image d30F or battle victory image d30S operation failure as its end The image d10F is displayed.

  Note that the player may feel uncomfortable because there is a display of the battle victory image d30S or a display of the battle defeat image d30F after performing the failure operation. Therefore, the battle image is not displayed at time t1C of the second stop operation (or at time t1B of the first stop operation), and the battle image d30 is started to be displayed at time t1E when the operation failure image d10F is not displayed. . That is, by not starting to display the battle image d30 immediately after the stop operation is performed, the display content of the battle image and the result of the player's operation are not related.

  FIG. 81 is a time chart showing the lighting time of the navigation generation status lamp 1190 in the modification 6-3. 81 (a) shows the case where the correct operation is performed in the game in which the last operation navigation in the navigation occurrence state 1 is performed, and the player wins the small winning combination 3 (push order bell), FIG. 81 (b) shows the navigation In a game in which the operation navigation has been executed for the internal winning of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the occurrence state 1, a stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation is performed and the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won Is shown. In addition, since the operation order of the correct answer in the game shown in FIG. 81 is “right middle left”, the notification content of the operation navigation is “right middle left”.

  When the navi generation state 1 ends in the game in which the operation navi is executed, the navi generation state lamp 1190 is turned on until the time t11 of medal insertion of the next game, as shown in FIG. 81 (a). That is, in the modification 6-3, after displaying the battle defeat image d30F which is the end of the battle image d30, the navigation generation state lamp 1190 is turned off. If the navigation occurrence status lamp 1190 is turned off at a timing earlier than the display timing of the battle defeat image d30F, the player does not see the end of the battle image d30, and the result of the termination / continuation of navigation occurrence state 1 is It is because it recognizes.

  On the other hand, when the navigation generation state 1 does not end in the game in which the operation navigation has been executed, the navigation generation state lamp 1190 continues lighting up even after the time t11 of medal insertion of the next game. When the navigation occurrence state 1 continues, it is not limited to the example of displaying the battle victory image d30S at the end of the battle effect, but as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the battle defeat image d30F is once displayed at the end. After that, the resurrection image d30S may be displayed.

  In the modification 6-3, since the battle effect is performed after the operation navigation is performed, in the game for executing the operation navigation based on the internal winning of the small winning combination 4 (common bell), the notification content of the operation navigation In the case where the stop operation not complying with the above is performed, there is a disadvantage that the player is notified that the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won immediately after the third stop operation (FIG. 80 (b)). reference). Even if the operation failure image d10F is displayed, the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won, and the medal is paid out. Therefore, after the third stop operation, even if the battle effect is performed, the battle effect has no substantial meaning.

  Therefore, in such a case, that is, in the game executing the operation navigation based on the internal winning of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the modification 6-3, the stop operation not following the notification content of the operation navigation If is performed, the battle effect may not be performed after the operation navigation is performed (Modification 6-4).

  FIG. 82 is a time chart showing the flow of the operation navigation and the battle effect of the modification 6-4. Specifically, in FIG. 82 (a), in the game in which the operation navigation is performed for the internal winning of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1, the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed When a small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won, FIG. 82 (b) shows the notification contents of the operation navigation in the game in which the operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of the small combination 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1 It shows the case where the small part 4 (common bell) is won by the stop operation not being followed. The notification content of the operation navigation in the game shown in FIG. 82 is "right middle left".

  When the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100 executes the battle effect after executing the operation navigation as shown in FIG. 82 (a). That is, in this case, the same operation as that of the modification 6-3 is performed (see FIG. 80A).

  On the other hand, when a stop operation not in accordance with the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100 does not execute the battle effect after the operation navigation is performed as shown in FIG. 82 (b). That is, the execution of the battle effect is scheduled when the start lever is operated, but if it is determined that the operation not in accordance with the operation navigation has been made, the execution of the scheduled battle effect is canceled. In this way, unnecessary battle effects are not performed.

-Variation of the correct operation of the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) In the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), when the small winning combination 3 (sed order bell) is internally won, the correct operation is the first stop operation Although one of the so-called six choice operation contents was set as the correct operation, the correct answer operation is set for the first stop operation, that is, so-called three choice operation One of the operation contents of may be the correct operation (Modification 7). For example, when a small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), a stop operation (hereinafter referred to as “left”) for setting the first stop reel as the left reel 1110, One of the stop operation (hereinafter, abbreviated as “middle”) in which the stop reel is the middle reel 1111 and the stop operation (hereinafter, abbreviated as “right”) in which the first stop reel is the right reel 1112 It may be set as the stop operation of the correct answer, and the player may win a prize in the small winning combination 3 (siding order bell) when the stop operation of the correct answer is performed. However, in the operation navigation of the modified example 7, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), one of the operation contents of the correct answer is notified from among the so-called six-choice operation order. For example, when “left” is set as the correct stop operation, “left middle right” or “right and left middle” is the correct answer stop operation, so either “left middle right” or “left and right middle” in operation navigation One is to be notified.

  In the above-described embodiment (the fourth embodiment), in the game in which the operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of the small winning combination 3 (send order bell), when the player makes an operation mistake, the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) There is a disadvantage that the player is barred that the internal winning combination is the small winning combination 3 (Soshinobu Bell), but in this modification 7, even if the player makes an operation mistake. Since there is a case that a small winning combination 3 (Sushing order bell) may be won, there is an advantage that it is difficult for the player to have the internal winning combination of the small winning combination 3 (Sending order bell).

  FIG. 83 (c) is a time chart showing the flow of the operation navigation and the battle effect of the seventh modification. More specifically, in a game in which the small winning combination 3 (Shunshi Bell) in the navigation occurrence state 1 is internally won, a stop operation not complying with the notification contents of the operation navigation and a correct stop operation are performed. It is a time chart when winning a prize). Note that the stop operation of the correct answer in the game shown in FIG. 83 (c) is "right", and the notification content of the operation navigation is "right middle left". Further, FIG. 83 (c) follows the game property of the modification 6-3 (the game property of starting to execute the battle effect after the end of the operation navigation).

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), the player has performed the stop operation of "right and left middle", so while performing the stop operation of the correct answer, the player does not perform the stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation. Therefore, the slot machine 1100 erases the operation navi image d10 at time t1C of the second stop operation not complying with the notification content of the operation navi. When an operation not following the notification content of the operation navigation is performed as described above, the operation failure image d10 may not be displayed, and the operation navigation image d10 that has been displayed up to that point may be deleted.

  However, since the player has performed a stop operation of the correct answer, the slot machine 1100 displays a winning image d40 (for example, a wording image such as "get 8 sheets") indicating a small winning combination 3 winning at time t1D of the third stop operation. Display and start executing the battle effect from time t1E thereafter. In the game shown in FIG. 83 (c), the end of the battle effect is a victory, and the navigation generation state 1 is continued. In this case, the player is further added to the small part 4 (common bell) in the game. It is highly likely that you will be mistaken for winning.

  As described above, when the stop operation of the correct answer is included in part of the notification contents of the operation navigator, the player is correct even if the stop operation is not performed according to the notification contents of the operation navigator. Since the stop operation may be made and a small winning combination 3 (Sushing bell) may be won, the player is internally elected to the small winning combination 3 (Sushing bell) from the winning result, and the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally It can not be guessed that it was won. That is, even in the game in which the operation navigation has been executed for the internal winning of the small winning combination 3 (Sushibe Bell), the game in which the operation navigation is performed for the internal winning of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is When a stop operation not in accordance with the notification content is made, a bell is won, and the navigation occurrence state 1 may continue, so it becomes more difficult to guess which bell has been internally won.

In the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), in the game in which the operation navigation is performed, which of the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) and the small winning combination 4 (common bell) has been internally won? In order not to be grasped by the player, the remaining number of operation navigation was not displayed. However, the remaining number of operation navigation may be displayed (Modification 8). However, in the modified example 8, when the inside winning is made to either the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state, a lottery (hereinafter referred to as “specified number of additional lotterys”) To add the specified number of times. This is because the player can not grasp which of the small winning combination 3 (sedition order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in the game in which the operation navigation is executed. In addition, the value of the operation navi counter is decremented by 1 when the internal winning combination is made for either the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) and the operation navigation is executed. That is, the value of the operation navigation counter matches the remaining number of times of the displayed operation navigation.

  FIG. 84 (a) is a time chart showing an operation outline of the slot machine 1100 in the navigation period of the navigation generation state 1 in which the prescribed number is 1 in the eighth modification. FIG. 84 (b) is a specified number lottery table used for the specified number of times drawing at the time of transition to the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2), and FIG. 84 (c) is a specified number of additions in the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) It is a figure showing typically the number-of-times addition lottery table used for a lottery. In the prescribed number lottery, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), one of the values 1, 2 and 3 is determined as the prescribed number by lottery, and in the prescribed number additional lottery, as shown in FIG. 84 (c). As the number of additions, a value of 0, 1 or 2 is determined by lottery. The prescribed number of times lottery and the prescribed number of times additional lottery are lottery processes performed by the main control unit 1300.

  In FIG. 84 (a), the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in the third game and the fifth game of the navigation period, and the operation navigation is executed, and the small winning combination 3 (sushibe bell) is performed in the seventh game. It shows the case of winning and executing the operation navigation. In the third game of the navigation period, two additional times are determined in the prescribed number additional lottery, and in the fifth and seventh games in the navigation period, the additional number of times is determined in the prescribed number additional lottery.

  The remaining number display is not shown but is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1157. In the first game and the second game of the navigation period, the operation navigation is not executed, so the value of the operation navigation counter remains at the initial value of 1. Yes, “1 remaining” is also displayed in the remaining number display.

  Next, the third game of the navigation period is a game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won and the operation navigation is executed. In addition, since 2 times were determined in the specified number of times additional drawing of the game, in the operation navigation command transmitted from the main control unit 1300 to the first sub control unit 1400, navigation information indicating notification content of the operation navigation, Contains count information indicating the number of additions. As a result, in the remaining display of the third game in the navigation period, the display transition of "1 remaining" → "0 remaining" (1 subtraction since the operation navigation is executed) → "2 remaining" (additional number added) Is done. On the other hand, the value of the operation navigation counter is set to 2, which is the final remaining number.

  As described above, in the operation navigation of the modification 8, when a change in the remaining number occurs, not only the final remaining number is displayed, but also the remaining number is displayed along with its transition.

  Next, the fifth game of the navigation period is a game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won and the operation navigation is executed. Further, since 0 times was determined in the specified number of additional drawing of the game, the value of the operation navigation counter is set to 1, and in the remaining number display of the fifth game of the navigation period, "remaining 2 times" → "remaining 1 It is displayed that "times".

  Next, the seventh game in the navigation period is a game in which the small winning combination 3 (Soshinobu Bell) is internally won and the operation navigation is executed. Since 0 times was determined in the specified number of times addition lottery of the game, the value of the operation navi counter is set to 0, and in the remaining number display of the seventh game of the navigation period, "1 remaining" → "0 remaining" Is displayed. In addition, since the value of the operation navi counter is 0, the navi period ends in this game, and the navi generation state 1 (RT1-2) is ended.

  According to the eighth modification, the remaining number of times of operation navigation is displayed, but since it is possible to add the specified number of times of operation navigation in the game in which the operation navigation is executed, the player can operate from the change of the number of remaining times of operation navigation. It can not be determined whether the internal winning combination of the game in which the navigation is executed is the small winning combination 3 (Sushibe Bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell). That is, it is difficult for the player to grasp the internal winning of the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the game in which the operation navigation is performed.

-Variation of symbol combination corresponding to small part 4 (common bell) In the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), the symbol combination corresponding to small part 3 (push order bell) and small part 4 (common bell) All made "Bell-Bell-Bell", and made the symbol combination of small part 3 (Soshibe bell) and small part 4 (common bell) completely identical. However, the symbol combination of the small part 3 (sedition bell) and the small part 4 (common bell) is not limited to this. For example, a symbol combination corresponding to small part 3 (sedition bell) is "bell-bell-bell", and a symbol combination corresponding to small part 4 (common bell) is "bell-bell-bell" and "bell-bell-""Replay", when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) internal winning, if one operation is performed "Bell-Bell-Bell", if another operation is performed, "Bell-Bell- "Replay" may be aligned on the effective line. That is, the stop mode when the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) wins may not be completely the same as the stop mode when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) wins.

-Other game characteristics In the game console, it is possible to introduce various game characteristics. For example, even when the right to execute the navigation period is obtained, there is a period during which the operation navigation is performed in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, and the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally It may be a game characteristic that alternately executes a period in which no operation navigation is performed in the won game. In the latter period, the set value can be easily predicted from the number of winnings of the small winning combination 4, but with the former period, the latter period can be made short, making prediction of the set value difficult. be able to.

  Furthermore, even when the right to execute the navigation period is obtained, the small role 3 (for example, a period during which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally elected) is selected. In the case of the internal bell winning in the forward bell), the order navigation may not be executed, and in the case of the internal winning of the small winning combination 4 (common bell), the pushing order navigation may be executed. Since the period in which the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is internally elected is generally a period disadvantageous to the player (a period in which the medal decreases), the set value is predicted from the number of times of execution of the order navigation Even if it is easy to do, it is because it is a period in which a loss exceeding the profit when the set value can be predicted can be expected. The player does not like to extend this period for a long time, but if the period has been extended because the symbol combination corresponding to the special character 1 or the special character 2 could not be stopped on the pay line, it is a relief It may be in the interests of the player in a certain sense.

-Combination with Modifications A to G of Second Embodiment The above-described embodiment (the fourth embodiment) may be combined with Modifications A and B of the second embodiment. For example, the display of the insertion image d30 may be started at the start of the navigation period, and the display of the insertion image d30 may be ended at the end of the navigation period, that is, the display of the insertion image d30 may be performed every game in the navigation period. . In this case, in the case where the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won under the condition where the insertion image d30 is displayed, the operation navigation is executed. By displaying the inserted image d30, the operation navigation can be made more noticeable, so that the operation error of the player can be further reduced. That is, when the player performs an operation not following during the navigation period, it is grasped whether the internal winning combination of the player is the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell). In this case, the possibility of grasping the internal winning combination can be reduced.

  Further, the above-mentioned embodiment (fourth embodiment) may be combined with the modification C of the second embodiment. For example, in the case of being internally elected to small part 3 (sush order bell) or small part 4 (common bell) in the navigation period, either large operation navigation displaying a large notification image, or small operation navigation displaying a small notification image May be performed. When the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, it is preferable to slightly increase the probability of executing the large operation navigation as compared to the case where the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) is internally winning. In the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, the possibility of making the operation navigation more noticeable than the game in which the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) is internally winning is greater. It will be reduced. As a result, in the game in which the small winning combination 4 is won internally, the operation error is reduced, and the winning combination internally made to the player is the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) It is possible to reduce the possibility of being grasped.

  Further, the embodiment (fourth embodiment) may be combined with the modification D of the second embodiment. For example, with the start of the navigation period, the lower limit position of the "sliding", which is the insertion image d30, is set to the first position (see FIG. 35 (a-2)) and display starts, and the insertion image d30 continues continuously until the navigation period ends If the player is internally elected to small part 3 (sush order bell) or small part 4 (common bell) during the navigation period, the lower limit position of the "sliding" which is the insertion image d30 is set to the second position (FIG. 35) (A-3) (see below), or the lower limit position of the "sliding" which is the insertion image d30 is stopped at the first position (hereinafter referred to as "stop") You may do it. When the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, it is preferable to slightly increase the probability of executing “move” as compared to the case where the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) is internally winning. In the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, the possibility of making the operation navigation more noticeable than the game in which the small winning combination 3 (sedition bell) is internally winning is greater. It will be reduced. As a result, in the game in which the small winning combination 4 is won internally, the operation error is reduced, and the winning combination internally made to the player is the small winning combination 3 (sush order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) It is possible to reduce the possibility of being grasped.

  Further, the above-described embodiment (fourth embodiment) may be combined with the modification F of the second embodiment. For example, when the insertion image d30 is started to be displayed at the start of the navigation period and the insertion image d30 is continuously displayed until the end of the navigation period, the navigation period longer than the navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) In state 2 (RT1-3), the probability that the insertion image d30 of a more noticeable color is selected may be slightly higher than in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2). That is, in the state advantageous to the player, the probability that the inserted image d30 of a more prominent color is displayed may be slightly increased. The player can determine whether or not it is in an advantageous state by looking at the color or pattern of the inserted image d30.

<Summary of the embodiment>
As described above, according to the gaming table (e.g., slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (e.g., the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (e.g., the reels) are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. 110 to 112) and a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels. And an image display unit (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in the image display area. The image display means displays a notification image (for example, operation specific images d10 and d10B of operation condition notification effects) indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means in the image display area. It is a means to show, and when the first condition is satisfied (for example, the game display operation such as start lever operation or stop operation is performed when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the operation order combination is internally won in AT state) Means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the notification image (for example, FIG. 30, etc.), and the image display means is a background image (for example, AT background image d2) in the image display area. ), And the image display means is a means for displaying an inserted image (for example, an inserted image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area, and the inserted image is continuously enlarged and reduced. When the second condition is satisfied (for example, in the final game in the AT state). Means for changing the display area of the inserted image in order to reduce the display area of the background image (when a game operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation is performed), When both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied at the same time (for example, when the operation order combination is internally won in the final game in the AT state, the start lever operation is performed, etc.), the notification The first basic configuration is to increase the display area of at least a part of the images and change the display area of the inserted image (for example, FIG. 36, FIG. 39, etc.).

  According to the first basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the notification image to be displayed is displayed while the insertion image is enlarged or reduced and the display area of the background image is narrowed. As a result, the notification image can be made to stand out, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. That is, the gaming machine of the first basic configuration is a new gaming machine in which the conventional information display is improved.

  Further, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) are provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols and are rotationally driven. And a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display A game console comprising image display means (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, said The image display means is a means for displaying in the image display area a notification image (for example, operation specific image d10, d10B of the operation condition notification effect) indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means Yes, when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the operation order combination is internally won in the AT state, and the game operation such as start lever operation or stop operation is performed), the image display means, The means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the notification image (for example, FIG. 30, etc.), the image display means displays a background image (for example, AT background image d2) in the image display area The image display means is means for displaying an insertion image (for example, an insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area, and the insertion image is continuously enlarged and reduced. It is an image that changes the display area (for example, FIGS. 35, 37, 38, etc.), and the image display means is in the case where the second condition is satisfied (for example, a star in the final game in the AT state) Means for changing the display area of the inserted image in order to reduce the display area of the background image when a game operation such as a lever operation or stop operation is performed, etc. When the first condition is satisfied in a period in which the second condition is satisfied and the display area of the inserted image is changed (for example, the second condition is the final state of the AT state). The first condition is satisfied at the end of the previous game, and the first condition is satisfied at the start lever when the operation order combination is internally won in the final game in the AT state, etc.), the display area of the inserted image is changed A second basic configuration is a means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the notification image (for example, FIG. 36, FIG. 39, etc.).

  According to the second basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the notification image to be displayed is displayed while the insertion image is enlarged or reduced and the display area of the background image is narrowed. As a result, the notification image can be made to stand out, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. That is, the second basic configuration of the gaming machine is a new gaming machine in which the conventional information display is improved.

  In the first basic configuration or the second basic configuration, the image display area is a rectangular area, and the inserted image is an image displayed in the vicinity of the inner edge over the entire circumference of the rectangular area. (For example, FIG. 40 (a) and the like), is taken as a first preferred configuration.

  According to the first preferred configuration, since the impression of narrowing the display area of the background image is intensified, the notification image can be made more noticeable.

  In the first basic configuration, the second basic configuration, or the first preferred configuration, the inserted image is a flame that continuously performs enlargement of the display area and disappearance of a part of the display area. The image showing the motion of water or smoke (for example, FIG. 38 and the like) has a second preferred configuration.

  According to the second preferred configuration, since the boundary between the insertion image and the background image is obscured, it is possible to express the change in the display area of the insertion image without a sense of discomfort.

  Further, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) are provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols and are rotationally driven. And a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display A game console comprising image display means (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, said The image display means is a means for displaying in the image display area a notification image (for example, operation specific image d10, d10B of the operation condition notification effect) indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means The notification image includes a first notification image (for example, the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the lower part of FIG. 42) and a second notification image (for example, the upper part in FIG. 42) larger than the first notification image. Operation specific images d10 and d10B), and the image display unit is configured to set the first image display area in the first case (for example, rendering state 1 such as RT2 (AT state)). Means for displaying the second notification image in the image display area in the second case (for example, rendering state 2 such as RT3 (AT state)) while displaying the notification image, the image display The means is when the first condition is satisfied in the first case (for example, when the game sequence such as start lever operation or stop operation is performed when the operation order combination is internally won in the AT state) The display area of at least a part of the first notification image is enlarged, and when the first condition is satisfied in the second case, the display of at least a part of the second notification image The image display means is means for displaying a background image (for example, an AT background image d2) in the image display area, and the image display means is an image for insertion in the image display area For example, when the second condition is established, the image display means is a means for displaying the insertion image d30) of the state transition suggestion effect, for example, a game such as a start lever operation or a stop operation in the final game of the AT state Means for enlarging the display area of the inserted image in order to reduce the display area of the background image (when an operation is performed) (eg, FIG. 35 etc.); In the first case, when both of the first condition and the second condition are satisfied at the same time (for example, when the operation order combination is internally won in the final game in the AT state), the start lever operation is And so on), while enlarging the display area of at least a part of the first notification image and enlarging the display area of the inserted image toward the first notification image, In the case where the first condition and the second condition are both satisfied at the same time, the display area of at least a part of the second notification image is enlarged and the second notification image is displayed. The third basic configuration is a means for expanding the display area of the inserted image (for example, FIG. 43).

  According to this third basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the notification image to be displayed is displayed while the insertion image is enlarged and the display area of the background image is narrowed. As it expands, the notification image can be made conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. In addition, since the notification image is larger in the advantageous gaming state, the notification image can be made more noticeable. That is, the third basic configuration of the gaming machine is a new gaming machine in which the conventional information display is improved.

  Further, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) are provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols and are rotationally driven. And a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display A game console comprising image display means (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, said In a plurality of gaming states, the image display means displays a notification image (for example, an operation specific image d10 of an operation condition notification effect, d showing an order of stop operations of the plurality of stop operation means in the image display area) 0B), and the notification image is a first notification image (for example, the operation specific image d10 or d10B in the lower part of FIG. 42) and a second notification image larger than the first notification image (For example, the operation specific image d10, d10B in the upper part of FIG. 42), and the image display means is the image display device in the first case (for example, rendering state 1 such as RT2 (AT state)) While the first notification image is displayed in the display area, the second notification image is displayed in the image display area in the second case (for example, rendering state 2 such as RT3 (AT state)). A means, the image display means, when the first condition is satisfied in the first case (for example, when the operation order combination is internally won in the AT state, play such as start lever operation or stop operation) The second notification image if the display area of at least part of the first notification image is enlarged while the first condition is satisfied in the second case) The image display means is means for displaying a background image (for example, AT background image d2) in the image display area, and the image display means is It is a means to display an insertion image (for example, insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the above-mentioned image display area, and the above-mentioned image display means start in the last game of an AT state, for example, when the second condition is satisfied. When a game operation such as a lever operation or a stop operation is performed, the display area of the inserted image is reduced in order to reduce the display area of the background image). It is a means to expand (for example, FIG. 35 etc.), The said image display means is a said 1st condition in the period which the said 2nd condition is satisfied in the said 1st case, and the display area of the said insertion image is expanded. Is satisfied (for example, the second condition is satisfied at the end of the previous game of the final game in the AT state, and the first condition is the start lever when the operation order combination is won internally in the final game in the AT state And so on), while enlarging the display area of the inserted image and enlarging the display area of at least a part of the first notification image, the second condition in the second case When the first condition is satisfied in a period during which the display area of the insertion image is enlarged, the display area of the insertion image is enlarged and at least a part of the image of the second notification image A means for enlarging the display area (e.g., FIG. 43), the fourth basic structure that.

  According to the fourth basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the notification image to be displayed is displayed while the insertion image is enlarged and the display area of the background image is narrowed. As it expands, the notification image can be made conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. In addition, since the notification image is larger in the advantageous gaming state, the notification image can be made more noticeable. That is, the fourth basic configuration of the gaming machine is a new gaming machine in which the conventional information display is improved.

  Further, in the third basic configuration, the image display means is configured to set the second notification image when both of the first condition and the second condition are satisfied at the same time in the second case. A third preferred configuration is to display in a superimposed manner in front of at least a part of the inserted image (for example, FIG. 43 (a), (c), etc.).

  According to the third preferred configuration, when the notification image is displayed large, the notification image is displayed in front of the insertion image, so that the notification image can be made more noticeable.

  In the fourth basic configuration, the image display means satisfies the first condition in a period in which the second condition is satisfied in the second case and the display area of the inserted image is changed. And displaying the second notification image in front of at least a part of the inserted image (for example, FIG. 43 (a), (c), etc.) as a fourth preferred configuration. Do.

  According to the fourth preferred configuration, when the notification image is displayed large, the notification image is displayed in front of the insertion image, so that the notification image can be made more noticeable.

  In the third basic configuration, the fourth basic configuration, the third preferred configuration, or the fourth preferred configuration, the image display unit is, in the first case, the image display area. The first notification image is displayed with a first shake, while the second notification image is displayed in the image display area in the second case, a second shake larger than the first shake. A fifth preferred configuration is a means for displaying along (for example, FIG. 43 (b), (d), etc.).

  According to the fifth preferred configuration, when the notification image is displayed large, the swing of the notification image is large, so that the background image can also be appropriately displayed.

  Further, in the third basic configuration, the fourth basic configuration, the third preferred configuration, the fourth preferred configuration, or the fifth preferred configuration, the inserted image includes an enlargement of a display area and A sixth preferred configuration is an image showing the movement of a flame, water, or smoke that continuously performs a partial disappearance of the display area.

  According to the sixth preferred configuration, since the boundary between the insertion image and the background image is ambiguous, it is possible to express the change in the display area of the insertion image without a sense of discomfort.

  Further, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) are provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols and are rotationally driven. And a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display A game console comprising image display means (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, said The image display means is a means for displaying in the image display area a notification image (for example, operation specific image d10, d10B of the operation condition notification effect) indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means Yes, when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the operation order combination is internally won in the AT state, and the game operation such as start lever operation or stop operation is performed), the image display means, The means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the notification image (for example, FIG. 30, etc.), the image display means displays a background image (for example, AT background image d2) in the image display area The image display means is a means for displaying an insertion image (for example, an insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area, and the image display means satisfies a second condition. (For example, when a game operation such as start lever operation or stop operation is performed in the final game in the AT state), a table of the inserted image to reduce the display area of the background image Means for enlarging the area, and the insertion image is a first movement of the first insertion image (eg, the insertion image d30 in the lower part of FIG. 44) and a second movement larger than the first movement A second insertion image (for example, the insertion image d30 in the upper part of FIG. 44) which enables the second display image, the image display means is in the first case (for example, the presentation state 1 such as RT2 (AT state) Etc.) while displaying the first inserted image in the image display area, while in the second case (eg, effect state 2 such as RT3 (AT state), etc.) The image display means is a means for displaying an image, and the display area of the first inserted image to reduce the display area of the background image when the second condition is satisfied in the first case. While expanding the second place Means for enlarging the display area of the second insertion image to reduce the display area of the background image when the second condition is satisfied, and the image display means is the first case When both of the first condition and the second condition are satisfied at the same time (for example, when the operation order combination is internally won in the final game in the AT state, when the start lever operation is performed, etc.) While enlarging the display area of at least a part of the notification image and the display area of the first insertion image, the first condition and the second condition in the second case It is means for enlarging the display area of the second insertion image and expanding the display area of at least a part of the notification images when both of the conditions are satisfied at the same time (for example, Etc. Figure 44), the fifth basic structure that.

  According to the fifth basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the notification image to be displayed is displayed while enlarging the insertion image and narrowing the display area of the background image. As it expands, the notification image can be made conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. In addition, in the advantageous game state, the amount of movement of the inserted image is further increased, so that the notification image can be made more noticeable. That is, the gaming machine of the fifth basic configuration is a new gaming machine in which the conventional information display is improved.

  Further, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) are provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols and are rotationally driven. And a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display A game console comprising image display means (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, said In a plurality of gaming states, the image display means displays a notification image (for example, an operation specific image d10 of an operation condition notification effect, d showing an order of stop operations of the plurality of stop operation means in the image display area) 0B), and the image display means is a game operation such as start lever operation or stop operation when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the operation order combination is internally won in the AT state) Means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the notification image (eg, FIG. 30, etc.), and the image display means is configured to display a background image (eg, AT) in the image display area. Means for displaying a background image d2), the image display means for displaying an insertion image (for example, an insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area; When two conditions are satisfied (for example, when a game operation such as start lever operation or stop operation is performed in the final game in the AT state, the previous game end of the final game in the AT state is ended And the like) is means for enlarging the display area of the insert image to reduce the display area of the background image, and the insert image is a first insert image to be moved first (for example, the lower part of FIG. 44). And a second insertion image (for example, the insertion image d30 at the top of FIG. 44) which enables a second movement larger than the first movement, and the image display means While the first inserted image is displayed in the image display area in the first case (for example, rendering state 1 such as RT2 (AT state)), while the second case (for example, RT3 (AT state) And the like, and the image display unit is configured to display the second inserted image in the image display area when the second condition is satisfied in the first case. Reduce the display area of the background image In order to reduce the display area of the background image when the second condition is satisfied in the second case while expanding the display area of the first insertion image. Means for enlarging the display area of the first image, and the image display means holds the first condition in a period in which the second condition is satisfied in the first case and the display area of the first inserted image is enlarged. Is satisfied (for example, the second condition is satisfied at the end of the previous game of the final game in the AT state, and the first condition is the start lever when the operation order combination is won internally in the final game in the AT state And so on) while enlarging the display area of the first insertion image and expanding the display area of at least a part of the notification image, the second condition in the second case Is established When the first condition is satisfied in a period during which the display area of the second insertion image is enlarged, the display area of the second insertion image is enlarged and at least a part of the notification image The sixth basic configuration is a means for enlarging the display area (for example, FIG. 44 and the like).

  According to the sixth basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the notification image to be displayed is displayed while the insertion image is enlarged and the display area of the background image is narrowed. As it expands, the notification image can be made conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. In addition, in the advantageous game state, the amount of movement of the inserted image is further increased, so that the notification image can be made more noticeable. That is, the gaming machine of the sixth basic configuration is a new gaming machine in which the conventional information display is improved.

  Further, in the fifth basic configuration, the image display means is configured to display the notification image as the second information when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied at the same time in the second case. A seventh preferred configuration is to display in a superimposed manner in front of at least a part of the inserted image (for example, FIG. 45A).

  According to the seventh preferred configuration, when the movement of the insertion image is displayed large, the notification image is displayed in front of the insertion image, so that the notification image can be made more noticeable.

  Further, in the sixth basic configuration, the image display means is configured to perform the first operation in a period in which the second condition is satisfied in the second case and the display area of the second insertion image is enlarged. According to an eighth preferred configuration, the notification image is superimposed on the front of at least a part of the second insertion image when the condition is satisfied.

  According to the eighth preferred configuration, when the movement of the insertion image is displayed large, the notification image is displayed in front of the insertion image, so that the notification image can be made more noticeable.

  Further, in the fifth basic configuration, the sixth basic configuration, the seventh preferred configuration, or the eighth preferred configuration, the first introductory image includes the second introductory image and the color or the second introductory image. The eighth preferred configuration is that the patterns are different images.

  According to the eighth preferred configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the state is advantageous based on the color or pattern of the inserted image.

  Further, in the fifth basic configuration, the sixth basic configuration, the seventh preferred configuration, the eighth preferred configuration, or the ninth preferred configuration, the inserted image is enlarged display area and A ninth preferred configuration is an image showing the movement of a flame, water, or smoke that continuously performs a partial disappearance of the display area.

  According to the ninth preferred configuration, since the boundary between the insertion image and the background image is ambiguous, it is possible to express the change in the display area of the insertion image without a sense of discomfort.

  Further, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) are provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols and are rotationally driven. And a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display A game console comprising image display means (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, said The image display means is a means for displaying in the image display area a notification image (for example, operation specific image d10, d10B of the operation condition notification effect) indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means Yes, when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the operation order combination is internally won in the AT state, and the game operation such as start lever operation or stop operation is performed), the image display means, It is a means to expand the display area of the image of at least one part of said alerting | reporting image (for example, FIG. 30, etc.), The said image display means displays a background image (for example, AT background image d2) in the said image display area. The image display means is a means for displaying an insertion image (for example, an insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area, and the image display means satisfies a second condition. (For example, when a game operation such as start lever operation or stop operation is performed in the final game in the AT state), a table of the inserted image to reduce the display area of the background image It is a means to expand the display area, and the insertion image is a first insertion image (for example, the insertion image d30 at the bottom of FIG. 46) having a first color or pattern, and the first color or pattern A second insertion image (for example, the insertion image d30 at the top of FIG. 46) having a different second color or pattern, and the image display means is in the first case (for example, RT2 (AT state) etc.) While displaying the first inserted image in the image display area in the rendering state 1 and the like), and the image display in the second case (for example, the rendering state 2 such as RT3 (AT state) and the like) Means for displaying the second inserted image in the area, and the image display means enlarges the display area of the first inserted image when the second condition is satisfied in the first case , In the second case It is a means to expand the display area of said 2nd insertion image, when 2nd condition is satisfied, Said image display means is both said 1st condition and said 2nd condition in said 1st case. Are simultaneously established (for example, when the operation order combination is internally won in the final game in the AT state, when the start lever operation is performed, etc.), at least a part of the notification images While enlarging the display area and enlarging the display area of the first insertion image, when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied at the same time in the second case, A seventh basic configuration is a means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the images and enlarging the display area of the second insertion image (for example, FIG. 46 and the like).

  According to the seventh basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the notification image to be displayed is displayed while the insertion image is enlarged and the display area of the background image is narrowed. As it expands, the notification image can be made conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. In addition, since the color or pattern of the inserted image is different in the advantageous gaming state, the notification image can be made more noticeable. That is, the gaming machine of the seventh basic configuration is a new gaming machine in which the conventional information display is improved.

  Further, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) are provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols and are rotationally driven. And a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display A game console comprising image display means (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, said The image display means is a means for displaying in the image display area a notification image (for example, operation specific image d10, d10B of the operation condition notification effect) indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means Yes, when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the operation order combination is internally won in the AT state, and the game operation such as start lever operation or stop operation is performed), the image display means, The means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the notification image (for example, FIG. 30, etc.), the image display means displays a background image (for example, AT background image d2) in the image display area The image display means is a means for displaying an insertion image (for example, an insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area, and the image display means satisfies a second condition. (For example, when a game operation such as start lever operation or stop operation is performed in the final game in the AT state, such as at the end of the game before the final game in the AT state), It is a means to enlarge the display area of the said insertion image in order to reduce a display area, The said insertion image is the 1st insertion image which has 1st color or pattern (for example, the insertion image d30 of the lower stage of FIG. 46) And a second inserted image having a second color or pattern different from the first color or pattern (for example, the inserted image d30 in the upper part of FIG. 46), the image display means In the case (for example, effect state 1 such as RT2 (AT state)), the first inserted image is displayed in the image display area, while in the second case (for example RT3 (AT state)) And the like. In the effect state 2, etc., the second inserted image is displayed in the image display area, and the image display unit is configured to, when the second condition is satisfied in the first case, Display area of a single inset image Means for enlarging the display area of the second inserted image when the second condition is satisfied in the second case, and the image display means is the first case in the first case. In the case where the second condition is satisfied and the first condition is satisfied in a period during which the display area of the first insertion image is enlarged (for example, the case in which the operation winning combination is internally won in the final game in the AT state) And when the start lever operation is performed), the display area of the first insertion image is enlarged and the display area of at least a part of the notification image is enlarged, and the second case When the first condition is satisfied in a period in which the second condition is satisfied and the display area of the second insertion image is enlarged, the display area of the second insertion image is enlarged and the notification image No Of a means for enlarging the display area of at least a portion of the image (e.g., FIG. 46), the eighth basic configuration that.

  According to the eighth basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the notification image to be displayed is displayed while the insertion image is enlarged and the display area of the background image is narrowed. As it expands, the notification image can be made conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. In addition, since the color or pattern of the inserted image is different in the advantageous gaming state, the notification image can be made more noticeable. That is, the gaming machine of the eighth basic configuration is a new gaming machine in which the conventional information display is improved.

  In the seventh basic configuration or the eighth basic configuration, the second insertion image is different from the first insertion image in that an operation pattern (for example, movement amount, movement speed, etc.) is different. The preferred configuration of

  According to the tenth preferred configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous state based on the motion pattern of the inserted image.

  Further, in the seventh basic configuration, the eighth basic configuration, or the tenth preferred configuration, the notification image is a first notification image (for example, the operation specific image d10 of FIG. 47 (b), d10B) and a second notification image (for example, operation specific images d10 and d10B in FIG. 47 (a)) larger than the first notification image, and the image display means includes the first case Wherein the first notification image is displayed in the image display area, and the second notification image is displayed in the image display area in the second case, and the image display means is configured to When the first condition is satisfied in the first case, the display area of at least a part of the first notification image is enlarged, while the first condition is satisfied in the second case , Less of the second notification image And also a means to enlarge the display area of the part of the image, and eleventh preferred configuration that.

  According to the eleventh preferred configuration, since the notification image is larger in the advantageous gaming state, the notification image can be made more noticeable.

  Further, in the seventh basic configuration, the eighth basic configuration, the tenth preferred configuration, or the eleventh preferred configuration, the insertion image is an enlargement of a display area and a part of the display area. According to a twelfth preferred configuration, the image is an image showing movement of flame, water, or smoke which is continuously performed with disappearing.

  According to the twelfth preferred configuration, since the boundary between the insertion image and the background image is ambiguous, it is possible to express the change in the display area of the insertion image without a sense of discomfort.

[Other game stand]
In the above embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball (for example, pachinko ball) is played The present invention is applicable to a slot machine as a medium, a pachinko machine, an arrange ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, a casino machine and the like.

  The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using a medal, and in this case, the game medium includes computerized data corresponding to the medal, and the game medium The insertion includes the input of digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device), and the payout of game media is the conversion of digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device) Including output.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the scope of the present invention. It is to be understood that variations and modifications of the invention can be made, and those accompanied by such variations and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention merely list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done.

100 Slot machine 110, 111, 112 Reel 113 Symbol display window 130, 131, 132 Medal insertion button 135 Start lever 137, 138, 139 Stop button 157 Effect image display 272, 277 Speaker 300 Main control unit 400 First sub control unit 420 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit d10 Operation specific image d20 Operation correct image d30 Insertion image d1, d2 Background image

Claims (2)

Three reels that are given various kinds of symbols and are rotationally driven,
Start operation means operated to start rotating the three reels;
Three stop operating means provided corresponding to each of the three reels and operated to individually stop the three reels being rotated;
Image display means for displaying an image in the image display area;
A game console equipped with
The image display means is means for displaying a notification image indicating the stop operation order of the three stop operation means in the image display area,
The notification image includes a first notification image and a second notification image different from the first notification image.
The first notification image and the second notification image are respectively a first stop operation notification image showing the stop operation means operated first and a second stop operation notification image showing the stop operation means operated second And a third stop operation notification image showing the stop operation means to be operated last,
The image display means is a means for displaying a background image in the image display area,
The image display means is a means for displaying an insertion image in the image display area,
The image display means is a means for enlarging the display area of the inserted image to reduce the display area of the background image when displaying the inserted image while displaying the background image in the image display area.
The insertion image includes a first insertion image having a first color or pattern, and a second insertion image having a second color or pattern different from the first color or pattern.
The image display means is a means for displaying the first inserted image in the image display area in the first effect state, and displaying the second inserted image in the image display area in the second effect state. Yes,
The image display means displays the first inserted image in the image display area in the first effect state and displays the first notification image, and the image in the second effect state There are cases where the second insertion image is displayed in the display area and the first notification image is displayed,
When the image display means displays the first inserted image in the image display area and displays the first notification image in the first effect state,
After operation on the start operation unit, said a first insertion image, the first of the first stop operation annunciation image of the notification image, of the first notification image the second stop operation notification image and the first while displaying apart and each of the third stop operation notification image for the notification image, the first insertion image the first stop operation notification image, the second stop operation notification image and the third stop operation notification Display so as not to overlap with any of the images (hereinafter referred to as the first display mode),
After the operation on the stop operation means indicated by the first stop operation notification image is performed when the first display mode is displayed, the first stop operation notification image is erased, and the second stop operation notification image is displayed. And enlarges the first insertion image, and displays the enlarged first insertion image so as not to overlap any of the enlarged second stop operation notification image and the third stop operation notification image. (Hereinafter referred to as the second display mode),
After the operation on the stop operation means indicated by the second stop operation notification image is performed when the second display mode is displayed, the second stop operation notification image is erased, and the third stop operation notification image is displayed. , And the enlarged first inserted image is displayed so as not to overlap the enlarged third stop operation notification image (hereinafter referred to as the third display mode). A means to
The interval between the first insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the second display mode is the interval between the first insertion image and the first stop operation notification image in the first display mode The interval is narrower than
The distance between the first insertion image and the third stop operation notification image in the third display mode, the distance between the first insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the second display mode The interval is narrower than
When the image display means displays the second inserted image in the image display area and displays the first notification image in the second effect state,
After operation on the start operation unit, said a second insertion image, the first of the first stop operation annunciation image of the notification image, of the first notification image the second stop operation notification image and the first while displaying apart and each of the third stop operation notification image for the notification image, the second of the insertion image first stop operation notification image, the second stop operation notification image and the third stop operation notification Display so as not to overlap with any of the images (hereinafter referred to as the fourth display mode),
After the operation to the stop operation means indicated by the first stop operation notification image is performed when the fourth display mode is displayed, the first stop operation notification image is erased, and the second stop operation notification image is displayed. And enlarge the second insertion image, and display the enlarged second insertion image so as not to overlap any of the enlarged second stop operation notification image and the third stop operation notification image. (Hereinafter referred to as the fifth display mode),
After the operation on the stop operation means indicated by the second stop operation notification image is performed when the fifth display mode is displayed, the second stop operation notification image is erased, and the third stop operation notification image is displayed. And the second inserted image is enlarged, and the enlarged second inserted image is displayed so as not to overlap with the enlarged third stop operation notification image (hereinafter referred to as the sixth display mode). A means to
The interval between the second insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the fifth display mode is the interval between the second insertion image and the first stop operation notification image in the fourth display mode The interval is narrower than
The distance between the second insertion image and the third stop operation notification image of the sixth display mode, a distance between the second insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the fifth display mode narrow interval der than is,
The image display means displays the first inserted image in the image display area in the first effect state, and displays the second notification image, and the image in the second effect state. The second insertion image may be displayed in the display area, and the second notification image may be displayed.
When the image display means displays the first inserted image in the image display area and the second notification image in the first effect state ,
After the operation on the start operation means, the first insertion image, the first stop operation notification image of the second notification image, the second stop operation notification image of the second notification image, and the second Displaying each of the third stop operation notification images of the notification image apart from each other (hereinafter, referred to as a seventh display mode);
After the operation on the stop operation means indicated by the first stop operation notification image is performed when the seventh display mode is displayed, the first stop operation notification image is erased, and the second stop operation notification image is displayed. While enlarging the first inserted image (hereinafter referred to as the eighth display mode),
After the operation on the stop operation means indicated by the second stop operation notification image is performed when there is the display of the eighth display mode, the second stop operation notification image is erased, and the third stop operation notification image is displayed. Means for enlarging and displaying the first inserted image (hereinafter referred to as the ninth display mode),
The interval between the first insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the eighth display mode is the interval between the first insertion image and the first stop operation notification image in the seventh display mode. The interval is narrower than
The interval between the first insertion image and the third stop operation notification image in the ninth display mode is the interval between the first insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the eighth display mode. The interval is narrower than
When the image display means displays the second inserted image in the image display area and displays the second notification image in the second effect state,
After the operation on the start operation means, the second inserted image, the first stop operation notification image of the second notification image, the second stop operation notification image of the second notification image, and the second Displaying each of the third stop operation notification images of the notification image apart (hereinafter, referred to as a tenth display mode);
After the operation on the stop operation means indicated by the first stop operation notification image is performed when the display mode of the tenth is displayed, the first stop operation notification image is erased, and the second stop operation notification image is displayed. While enlarging the second inserted image (hereinafter referred to as an eleventh display mode),
After the operation on the stop operation means indicated by the second stop operation notification image is performed when the display mode of the eleventh is displayed, the second stop operation notification image is erased, and the third stop operation notification is performed. It is a means for enlarging the image and displaying the second inserted image in an enlarged manner (hereinafter referred to as the twelfth display mode),
The interval between the second insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the eleventh display mode is between the second insertion image and the first stop operation notification image in the tenth display mode. The interval is smaller than the interval,
The interval between the second insertion image and the third stop operation notification image in the twelfth display mode is the interval between the second insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the eleventh display mode. Interval smaller than the interval between
The image display means is a means for setting the rate at which the first notification image is displayed in the first effect state to a rate higher than the rate at which the second notification image is displayed in the first effect state Yes,
The image display means is a means for setting the rate at which the second notification image is displayed in the second effect state to a rate higher than the rate at which the first notification image is displayed in the second effect state is there,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
The insertion image is an image showing an action of flame, water or smoke which continuously performs enlargement of the display area and disappearance of a part of the display area.
A game stand characterized by